Operating Instructions Installation Instructions Main motor SIMOTICS M-1PH8 Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Edition 01/2019 www.siemens.com/drives 31.01.2019 10:33 V22.00 Introduction 1 Safety information 2 Main motor Description 3 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Preparations for use 4 Mounting 5 Electrical connection 6 Commissioning 7 Operation 8 Maintenance 9 Spare parts 10 Disposal 11 Operating Instructions Installation Instructions Edition 01/2019 Service and Support A Technical specifications B Quality documents C Additional documents D Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Document order number: A5E35768675A AD 01/2019 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2019. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................13 2 Safety information.......................................................................................................................................15 2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical installation .........................15 2.2 The 5 safety rules...................................................................................................................15 2.3 Qualified personnel ................................................................................................................16 2.4 Safe handling .........................................................................................................................16 2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices ...............................................................................................18 2.6 Interference immunity.............................................................................................................19 2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter ..............................................................19 2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations.................19 3 Description..................................................................................................................................................21 4 Preparations for use ...................................................................................................................................29 4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant..............................................29 4.2 Observing the operating mode...............................................................................................29 4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors .......................................................................29 4.4 Ensuring cooling.....................................................................................................................30 4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan ........................................................................................33 4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option)...........................................................33 4.7 Thermal motor protection .......................................................................................................34 4.8 Overheating during periodic duty ...........................................................................................34 4.9 Noise emissions .....................................................................................................................35 4.10 Rotational speed limit values .................................................................................................35 4.11 System-inherent frequencies .................................................................................................35 4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply ................................35 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 4.13.3 4.13.4 4.13.5 4.13.6 4.13.7 4.13.8 4.13.9 Transport and storage............................................................................................................36 Checking the delivery.............................................................................................................36 Lifting and transportation........................................................................................................36 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation.............................40 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation.................................40 Transporting the machine set.................................................................................................41 Storage...................................................................................................................................41 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage ................................................................43 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors......................................................44 Protection against corrosion...................................................................................................45 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 5 Table of contents 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 4.14.3 5 6 6 Converter operation ...............................................................................................................45 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................45 Converter input voltage ..........................................................................................................46 Insulated bearings for converter operation.............................................................................46 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................49 5.1 Safety instructions for mounting.............................................................................................49 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 Preparing for installation ........................................................................................................50 Requirements for installation..................................................................................................50 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................50 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index........................................................51 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3) .................................................................................54 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting) .................................................................54 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.7 5.3.8 5.3.9 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it ...................................................54 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment .................................................54 Checking the load handling attachments ...............................................................................54 Removing anti-corrosion protection .......................................................................................55 Mounting the output elements................................................................................................55 Lifting and transporting the machine ......................................................................................57 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor) ...........................................58 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12) ........................................................59 Putting the machine down......................................................................................................60 Roughly aligning the machine ................................................................................................60 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 Installing the machine ............................................................................................................61 Selecting fixing screws...........................................................................................................61 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation ................................................................61 Vibration severity....................................................................................................................61 Aligning to the driven machine ...............................................................................................63 Mounting the motor ................................................................................................................65 5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply .....................................................................................65 5.6 Refitting the external fan ........................................................................................................66 Electrical connection...................................................................................................................................67 6.1 Safety instructions for the electrical connection .....................................................................67 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 Preparation.............................................................................................................................68 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................68 Connect up the ground conductor..........................................................................................68 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 Connecting .............................................................................................................................69 Circuit diagram .......................................................................................................................69 Terminal designation..............................................................................................................69 Laying cables .........................................................................................................................70 Electrical connection data ......................................................................................................70 Connection with cable lugs ....................................................................................................71 Connecting aluminum conductors..........................................................................................73 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover...................................................73 Performing connection operations .........................................................................................74 Internal equipotential bonding ................................................................................................74 6.4 Auxiliary circuits .....................................................................................................................75 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Table of contents 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.4.2.3 6.4.2.4 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 7 8 9 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................75 Connecting an external fan ....................................................................................................75 Connecting an EC external fan ..............................................................................................77 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75) ..........................................78 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75) ....................................79 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75) ..................................................................80 Connecting the speed encoder ..............................................................................................82 Connect the holding brake .....................................................................................................83 Connecting the temperature sensor.......................................................................................83 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................84 Converter operation on a grounded network..........................................................................85 Commissioning ...........................................................................................................................................87 7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................88 7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning ..................................................................89 7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor .....................................................................91 7.4 Switching on...........................................................................................................................91 7.5 Test run ..................................................................................................................................92 7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) ................................................93 Operation....................................................................................................................................................95 8.1 Safety instructions for operation.............................................................................................95 8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water ...................................................97 8.3 Switching on the machine ......................................................................................................98 8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors .........................................................................................98 8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors .....................................................................................98 8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off ............................................................99 8.7 8.7.1 Stoppages ..............................................................................................................................99 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages ....................................................99 8.8 Decommissioning the machine ............................................................................................100 8.9 Re-commissioning the machine ...........................................................................................100 8.10 8.10.1 8.10.2 8.10.3 8.10.4 8.10.5 8.10.6 Faults ...................................................................................................................................100 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................100 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors ...........................................................................101 Electrical faults at water-cooled motors ...............................................................................101 Mechanical faults .................................................................................................................102 Roller bearing faults .............................................................................................................103 Holding brake faults .............................................................................................................103 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................105 9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components........................................................105 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 Inspection and maintenance ................................................................................................106 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance.............................................................106 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................107 Initial inspection....................................................................................................................107 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 7 Table of contents 10 8 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.2.7 9.2.7.1 9.2.7.2 9.2.7.3 9.2.7.4 9.2.7.5 9.2.7.6 9.2.7.7 9.2.7.8 Main inspection ....................................................................................................................108 Regreasing intervals ............................................................................................................108 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings ................109 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................109 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work......................109 Maintenance intervals ..........................................................................................................109 Rolling-contact bearings.......................................................................................................110 Lubrication............................................................................................................................110 Cleaning the spent grease chamber ....................................................................................116 Maintaining the cooling water system ..................................................................................116 Servicing the external fan.....................................................................................................116 Maintaining terminal boxes ..................................................................................................118 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9 9.3.10 9.3.11 9.3.12 9.3.13 9.3.14 Repair...................................................................................................................................119 Prepare servicing work.........................................................................................................119 Screws with preCOTE coating .............................................................................................120 Disassembling a water-cooled motor ...................................................................................120 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor...................................................................................121 Removing and installing the protecting ring .........................................................................122 Removing and mounting the bearing shields .......................................................................123 Installing and sealing the motor ...........................................................................................123 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.)........................................................................................125 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.) .........................................................................126 Removing and mounting the external fan ............................................................................126 Removing and mounting the speed sensor..........................................................................128 Connecting the speed encoder ............................................................................................130 Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module)......................................................130 Touch up any damaged paintwork .......................................................................................131 Spare parts ...............................................................................................................................................133 10.1 Ordering data .......................................................................................................................133 10.2 Spare parts kits ....................................................................................................................133 10.3 Holding brake .......................................................................................................................134 10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet ...................................................................................134 10.5 Anti-condensation heating....................................................................................................135 10.6 10.6.1 10.6.2 10.6.3 10.6.4 10.6.5 10.6.6 10.6.7 10.6.8 10.6.9 Water-cooled motor..............................................................................................................135 Water-cooled motor, complete .............................................................................................135 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................136 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling..........................................................137 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing ...........................138 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent lubrication .........139 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication.............................140 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................141 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................142 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance" ................................................143 10.7 10.7.1 10.7.2 10.7.3 10.7.4 Force-ventilated motor .........................................................................................................144 Force-ventilated motor, complete.........................................................................................144 External fan ..........................................................................................................................145 External fan (option L75)......................................................................................................145 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................146 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Table of contents 11 10.7.5 10.7.6 10.7.7 10.7.8 10.7.9 10.7.10 10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling............................................................................147 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing .............................................148 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication ...........................149 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication ...................................................150 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................151 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................152 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance" ......................................................................153 10.8 Terminal box ........................................................................................................................154 10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................................................................155 10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)............................................................................................156 Disposal....................................................................................................................................................157 11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances ...............................................157 11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation ..............................................157 11.3 Preparing for disassembly....................................................................................................158 11.4 Dismantling the machine......................................................................................................158 11.5 Disposal of components.......................................................................................................158 A Service and Support .................................................................................................................................161 B Technical specifications............................................................................................................................163 B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections..............................................................163 C Quality documents....................................................................................................................................165 D Additional documents ...............................................................................................................................167 D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake.........................................167 D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake...................................................................................169 D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180 .....................193 D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225 .....................207 D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ...................221 D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ...................235 D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180.......................249 D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225.......................263 D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ....................279 D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ....................293 D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280.......................309 Index.........................................................................................................................................................323 Tables Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate........................................................................................................22 Table 3-2 Machine design ........................................................................................................................23 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 9 Table of contents Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake ............................................................................................26 Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions .............................................................................................................27 Table 4-1 Cooling water specification .......................................................................................................29 Table 4-2 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor ..............................................39 Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40 C ..............................................................................52 Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity ...............................................................................62 Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity ................................................................................62 Table 5-4 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor .........................................................................64 Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop ...................................................................................................66 Table 6-1 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example ..............................................................69 Table 6-2 Data for electrical connection ......................................................................................................71 Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces .................................................................................................................90 Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning ...............................93 Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures ...................................................................93 Table 8-1 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................101 Table 8-2 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................102 Table 8-3 Mechanical faults.......................................................................................................................102 Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair .............................................................................................107 Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection .....................................................108 Table 9-3 Maintenance measures .............................................................................................................109 Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases...............................................................................111 Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction ..................................112 Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction .........112 Table 9-7 Grease for the "Performance" version.......................................................................................112 Table 10-1 Motor, complete ........................................................................................................................135 Table 10-2 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing ................................................................................................................................136 Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......137 Table 10-4 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....138 Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .................................................................................................................................139 Table 10-6 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication .................140 Table 10-7 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............141 Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ...............................142 Table 10-9 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing .............................143 Table 10-10 Motor, complete .......................................................................................................................144 Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan.......................................................................................................145 10 .........................................................................33 .............................................................................................................103 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Table of contents Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing ................................................................................................................................146 Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......147 Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....148 Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .................................................................................................................................149 Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................150 Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............151 Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ..............................152 Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing .............................153 Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box .....................................................................................................154 Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............................................................155 Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.) ............................................................................156 Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of 10%........................................163 Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake ..........................................................................................167 Figures Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate ..................................................................................................21 Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and 1PH822.) .....................................................................................................................................31 Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23 ......................................................................................................32 Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55 ........32 Figure 4-4 Lifting the machine (schematic representation)...........................................................................38 Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace ...................................................................................................................39 Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive .................................................................................47 Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side ..........................................................................................55 Figure 5-2 Water drain holes ........................................................................................................................59 Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822. .........................................................................59 Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and vibration acceleration ..................................................................................................................62 Figure 5-5 Aligning the motor .......................................................................................................................64 Figure 6-1 Terminal lug for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor ..................................68 Figure 6-2 Figure 6-3 Terminal lug for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor ......................................69 External fan terminal box (schematic representation)............................................................77 Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box (schematic representation)............................................................78 Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE)................................................................81 Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE).................................................................81 Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection ..............................................................................................82 Figure 6-8 Sensor Module mounted on the terminal box ........................................................................83 Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples and , schematic representation for types 1PH818. and 1PH822. ....115 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 11 Table of contents Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple and (schematic representation for type 1PH828.) ............................115 Figure 9-3 Fitting the protecting ring...........................................................................................................123 Figure 9-4 Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation) ..............125 Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal....................................................................................................126 Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.) ....................................................................127 Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.) ....................................................................................127 Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder ..........................................................................................128 Figure 9-9 Electrical connection of the speed sensor ................................................................................130 Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete) ...................................................................................135 Figure 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................136 Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ..............................137 Figure 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................138 Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......139 Figure 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................................140 Figure 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................141 Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................142 Figure 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................143 Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete.....................................................................144 Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ............................................................145 Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................146 Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ..............................147 Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................148 Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......149 Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ...............................................150 Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................151 Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................152 Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................153 Figure 10-20 Terminal box..............................................................................................................................154 Figure 10-21 Speed encoder ..........................................................................................................................155 Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.).................................................................................................156 12 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 1 Introduction In the following text, the motor is referred to as "electrical machine" - or abbreviated, just "machine". These operating instructions are valid for 1PH8 induction motors in shaft heights 180 ... 280 in a force-ventilated or water-cooled version. 1PH818.1 and 1PH818.3 1PH822.1 and 1PH822.3 1PH828.1 The serial number of the motor can be found on the rating plate. These instructions describe the machine and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to final disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use. Read these operating instructions before you handle the machine and follow the instructions to become familiar with its design and operating principles and thus ensure safe, problem-free machine operation and long service life. Safety instructions and handling-related warning notes are provided in these instructions. When carrying out any activity at or with the machine, carefully comply with all of these notes for your own safety, to protect other people and to avoid material damage. Please contact the Service Center (Page 161) if you have any suggestions on how to improve this document. Text format features You can find the following text format features in these instructions: 1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps in the order given. Lists are formatted as bulleted lists. - Lists on the second level are hyphenated. Note The note provides you with additional information about the product itself, handling the product - and the relevant documentation. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 13 Introduction 14 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Safety information 2.1 2 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical installation This electric machine has been designed and built in accordance with the specifications contained in Directive 2014/35/EU ("Low-Voltage Directive") and is intended for use in industrial plants. Please observe the country-specific regulations when using the electric machine outside the European Community. Follow the local and industry-specific safety and setup regulations. The persons responsible for the plant must ensure the following: Planning and configuration work and all work carried out on and with the machine is only to be done by qualified personnel. The operating instructions must always be available for all work. The technical data as well as the specifications relating to the permissible installation, connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken into account at all times. The specific setup and safety regulations as well as regulations on the use of personal protective equipment are observed. Note Use the services and support provided by the local service center (Page 161) for planning, installation, commissioning and service work. 2.2 The 5 safety rules For your own personal safety and to prevent material damage when carrying out any work, always observe the safety-relevant instructions and the following five safety rules according to EN 501101 "Working in a voltage-free state". Apply the five safety rules in the sequence stated before starting work. 5 safety rules 1. Disconnect the system. Also disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example, anti-condensation heating. 2. Secure against reconnection. 3. Verify absence of operating voltage. 4. Ground and short-circuit. 5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts. To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 15 Safety information 2.3 Qualified personnel 2.3 Qualified personnel All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of this documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following requirements: Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks and potential dangers in their particular field of activity. They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person responsible. 2.4 Safe handling Workplace safety depends on the attentiveness, care, and common sense of the personnel who install, operate, and maintain the machine. In addition to the safety measures cited, as a matter of principle, the use of caution is necessary when you are near the machine. Always pay attention to your safety. Also observe the following to prevent accidents: General safety regulations applicable in the country where the machine is deployed. Manufacturer-specific and application-specific regulations Special agreements made with the operator Separate safety instructions supplied with the machine Safety symbols and instructions on the machine and its packaging Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts) Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum clearance and creepage distances may be violated when coming close to live parts. Touching or coming close to them can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Ensure that all live parts are suitably covered. Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5 safety rules". Risk of injury due to rotating parts Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Ensure that all rotating parts are reliably covered. Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5 safety rules". Only remove covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill. 16 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Safety information 2.4 Safe handling Risk of burns due to hot surfaces Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into contact with these parts. Never touch machine parts during operation. Allow the machine to cool before starting work on the machine. Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective equipment. Health hazard due to chemical substances Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines can present a health risk. Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer. Flammable substances hazard Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines may be flammable. These substances can ignite if handled incorrectly. They can cause burns and property damage. Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer. See also The 5 safety rules (Page 15) Noise emissions During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the workplace, which can cause hearing damage. Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation. Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system. The following measures may help to reduce noise. - Covers - Noise insulation - Hearing protection measures SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 17 Safety information 2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices 2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices Material damage due to electrostatic discharge Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These components can be damaged or destroyed if they are not handled correctly. To protect equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below. Only touch electronic modules if you absolutely have to work on them. The body of the person concerned must have been electrostatically discharged and grounded immediately before any electronic modules are touched. Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials, such as: - Plastic film - Plastic parts - Insulating table supports - Clothing made of synthetic fibers Always place electrostatic sensitive devices on conductive bases. Always pack, store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive packaging, such as: - Metallized plastic or metal containers - Conductive foam material - Domestic aluminum foil The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatic sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings: 6WDQGLQJSRVLWLRQ 6HDWLQJSRVLWLRQ G E 6WDQGLQJVHDWLQJSRVLWLRQ G H I F D I I F G E D a = conductive floor surfaceb = ESD table d = ESD overall e = ESD wristband H I I F D c = ESD shoes f = cabinet ground connection See also Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module) (Page 130) 18 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Safety information 2.6 Interference immunity 2.6 Interference immunity By selecting suitable signal cables and evaluation units, ensure that the interference immunity of the machine is not diminished. 2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter Interference voltages when operating the converter When a converter is in operation, the emitted interference varies in strength depending on the converter (manufacturer, type, interference suppression measures undertaken). On machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), interference voltages caused by the converter may occur on the sensor lead. This can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage. Comply with the EMC information provided by the manufacturer of the converter. This is how you prevent the limit values stipulated by IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for the drive system (consisting of the machine and converter) from being exceeded. You must put appropriate EMC measures in place. 2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations Electrical power equipment generate electromagnetic fields during operation. Potentially lethal malfunctions can occur in medical implants, e.g. pacemakers, in the vicinity of electrical power equipment. Data may be lost on magnetic or electronic data carriers. Protect the personnel working in the plant by taking appropriate measures, such as erecting identifying markings, safety barriers and warning signs and giving safety talks. Observe the nationally applicable health and safety regulations. It is forbidden for people with pacemakers to be close to the machine. Do not carry any magnetic or electronic data media. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 19 Safety information 2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations 20 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 3 Description Application range The motors of the 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. series are used as industrial drives. They have been designed to address a wide range of drive applications exclusively fed from converters. They are characterized by their high power density, ruggedness, long lifetime, and overall reliability. WARNING Risk of explosion This machine is not designed for use in hazardous areas. An explosion can occur if the machine is operated in these areas. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Never operate this machine in hazardous areas. Rating plate The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The data on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage. a0RW ,0 7+&/ + ,3 8 1 9 1R1 , 1 $ 31 N: FRV I 1 +] Q 1 PLQ &2'( QPD[ PLQ ,(&(1 6LHPHQV$* 0DGHLQ*HUPDQ\'13/4UQEHUJ Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 21 Description Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate No. Description No. Description 010 MLFB 200 Rated current IN (3) 012 Consecutive number, part of serial number 210 Rated power PN (3) 020 Serial number * 220 cos (3) 025 UL approval 230 Rated frequency fN (3) 026 (empty) 240 Rated speed nN (3) 030 Type of construction 250 Operating mode (3) 035 (empty) 255 Code for operating point 3 036 (empty) 260 Rated voltage VN (4) 040 Degree of protection 261 Switching mode 4 045 Type of balancing 270 Rated current IN (4) 050 Rated voltage UN (1) 280 Rated power PN (4) 051 Connection type 1 290 cos (4) 060 Rated current IN (1) 300 Rated frequency fN (4) 070 Rated power PN (1) 310 Rated speed nN (4) 080 cos (1) 320 Operating mode (4) 090 Rated frequency fN (1) 325 Code for operating point 4 100 Rated speed nN (1) 330 Maximum current IMAX 110 Operating mode (1) 335 Weight 115 Code for operating point 1 340 Maximum torque MMAX 120 Rated voltage UN (2) 350 Maximum speed nMAX 121 Connection type 2 360 Temperature sensor 130 Rated current IN (2) 370 Tachometer/resolver 140 Rated power PN (2) 380 Cooling method 150 cos (2) 390 Throughput l/min (m3/s) 160 Rated frequency fN (2) 400 System pressure 170 Rated speed nN (2) 410 Maximum coolant temperature 180 Operating mode (2) 420 Options (I) 185 Code for operating point 2 430 Options (II) 190 Rated voltage UN (3) 440 Optional customer information 191 Connection type 3 450 Anti-condensation heater / place holder * Based on the serial number, you can identify where the machine was manufactured and where you can have your questions answered: No:N... = Nuremberg No.UC... = Frenstat Rotor This machine is an induction motor for low voltage with squirrel-cage induction motor and integrated cooling circuit. 22 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Description Machine design The regulations and standards used as basis for designing and testing this machine are stamped on the rating plate. The machine design basically complies with the subsequent standards: Please refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for the versions of the harmonized standards referenced. Table 3-2 Machine design Feature Standard Dimensions and operation characteristics IEC / EN 60034-1 Degree of protection IEC / EN 60034-5 Cooling IEC / EN 60034-6 Type of construction IEC / EN 60034-7 Terminal markings and direction of rotation IEC/EN 60034-8 Noise emission IEC / EN 60034-9 Mechanical vibrations IEC / EN 60034-14 IECstandard voltages IEC/DIN IEC 60038 Vibration limit values DIN ISO 10816-3 Relevant directives The following directives are relevant for the SIMOTICS motor series. European low-voltage directive The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU. European machinery directive The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the machinery directive. However, the use of the products in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety. European EMC Directive The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the EMC directive. The products are not considered as devices in the sense of the directive. Eurasian conformity The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/ Kazakhstan customs union (EAC). China Compulsory Certification The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification (CCC). SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 23 Description Underwriters Laboratories The SIMOTICS motor series generally complies with UL and cUL requirements as component of motor applications - and is correspondingly listed. Specifically developed motors and functions are the exceptions in this case. Here, it is important that you carefully observe the contents of the quotation and that there is a cUL mark on the rating plate (nameplate)! Quality management system Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001 and ISO 14001. Certificates that can be downloaded You can download certificates for the SIMOTICS motor series at the following link: Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13358/cert) Drive The motor speed is controlled using a converter. NOTICE Destruction of the machine when operated directly from the line supply The machine will be destroyed if it is directly connected to the line supply. Only operate the machine using a converter. Types of construction The motor is supplied with two attached lifting eyes. The type construction can be found on the rating plate. Vertical type of construction For IM V5 and IM V15 types of construction with "shaft extension pointing downward", the motor is equipped with two additional Vario eye bolts. The Vario eyebolts are in the terminal box. NOTICE Protection against falling parts For vertical types of construction, protect the air intake or discharge against falling parts, e.g. by attaching a canopy. Otherwise the machine could be damaged. Cooling water-cooled motors Cooling circuit The cooling circuit consists of an enclosed, internal air circulation, which is driven by the shaftmounted fans and stainless steel tubes that are directly integrated into the laminated stator core; cooling type IC 71W according to IEC / EN 600346. 24 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Description Cooling capacity To ensure adequate cooling of the motor, it is essential to adhere to the specified cooling water rate, temperature and cooling water quality (Page 29). Cooling with external fan The machine has cooling method IC 416 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6. The separately driven fan unit and the terminal box can be mounted in a different position depending on the order. WARNING Improper use of the external fan Improper use of the external fan can result in death, serious injury, and material damage. Observe and follow the operating instructions of the external fan. See also Additional documents (Page 167) External fan Different external fans are used depending on the shaft height and particular motor version: Type Version External fan 1PH818. Standard version EC external fan with single-phase EC motor 1PH822. Version with option L75 External fan with three-phase motor Version with option L76 EC external fan with three-phase EC motor Standard version External fan with three-phase EC motor 1PH828. EC external fans with a fixed operating speed have been specifically designed for this motor series. Degree of protection Depending on the version, the machine has degree of protection IP23 or IP55. Supplementary devices A temperature sensor is integrated in the stator winding to monitor the winding temperature. The type of temperature sensor is specified on the rating plate. Depending on the order options, various supplementary devices such as encoder systems can be either installed or mounted. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 25 Description Holding brake Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height. NOTICE Technical data for the special version of the holding brake The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply. Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake Technical data NFF-A 63 NFF-A 100 AH180 AH225 Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600 Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100 Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88 Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm2] 0,022 0,051 Total moment of inertia (emer gency stop) Jtotal [kgm2] 1,3 3,9 Rated voltage U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC) Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210 Coil current I [A] 2,21 2,70 Number of emergency stops Z - 2100 1200 Opening time [ms] 300 300 Closing time [ms] 80 100 Note More information Commissioning (Page 87) See also Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169) Ambient conditions The standard machines are not suitable for use in corrosive atmospheres, atmospheres with a high salt content, or outdoor applications. 26 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Description Roller bearings The machines are equipped with different types of roller bearings depending on the version and the operating conditions described in the order. If the machine is equipped with a regreasing system, you will find the relevant data on the machine's lubricant plate. The following standard roller bearing versions are available: Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions Design Bearings Standard design and "Performance" Drive end deep-groove ball bearing as spring-loaded floating bearing Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing Version for increased radial forces Drive end cylindrical-roller bearing as floating bearing Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing Paint finish The machine is painted according to the instructions in your order. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 27 Description 28 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 4 Preparations for use Good planning and preparation of machine applications are essential in terms of keeping installation simple and avoiding errors, ensuring safe operation, and allowing access to the machine for servicing and corrective maintenance. This chapter outlines what you need to consider when configuring your plant in relation to this machine and the preparations you need to make before the machine is delivered. 4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant A number of residual risks are associated with the machine. These are described in the chapter titled "Safety information" (Page 15) and in related sections. Take appropriate safety precautions (covers, barriers, markings, etc.) to ensure the machine is operated safely within your plant. 4.2 Observing the operating mode Observe the machine's operating mode. Use a suitable control system to prevent overspeeds, thus protecting the machine from damage. 4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors The values specified for the cooling water correspond to the requirements for a closed cooling circuit. Not all of the specified concentrations will occur in the cooling water at the same time. A filter can be used to ensure smooth operation; the grade of filtration should not exceed 100 m. Cooling water specification Table 4-1 Cooling water specification Constituent Value pH value 6.0 ... 9.0 Total hardness < 170 ppm Conductivity < 500 S/cm Chloride ions < 40 ppm Sulfate ions < 50 ppm Nitrate ions < 50 ppm Dissolved solids < 340 ppm Max. grain size < 100 m SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 29 Preparations for use 4.4 Ensuring cooling Constituent Value Operating pressure 6 bar max. Inlet temperature < 30C Minimum cooling water inlet temperature Tcooling water > Tambient - 5 K Anti-freeze protection / corrosion protection 20 ... 30 % Inhibitor NALCO 00GE056 0.2 ... 0,25 % Cooling water intake temperature The maximum cooling water intake temperature is 30 C. NOTICE Condensation for an excessively low cooling water intake temperature If the temperature difference between cooling water and ambient temperature is greater than 5 K, this may result in condensation forming in the machine. This results in material damage. Make sure that the condensation can drain away freely. Adopt appropriate measures to achieve the required intake temperature of the cooling water. Alternatively, dry the ambient air. 4.4 Ensuring cooling Note Note also the technical data on the rating plates on the motor enclosure. 30 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.4 Ensuring cooling Preconditions for adequate cooling For motors that are cooled by the ambient air, the cooling air must be able to flow unimpeded to and from the motors. Hot discharged air should not be drawn in again. NOTICE Overheating If the required cooling air flow cannot be maintained, the machine can overheat. This can result in material damage. Maintain the required minimum clearance for customer-supplied mounted accessories at the air intake opening and at the air discharge openings to ensure the required cooling air flow. Comply with the conditions of the IP degree of protection. More stringent requirements regarding the IP degree of protection may necessitate the installation of suitable filters and special arrangement of the intake and outlet openings. Equipment and cables must be connected without strain. Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and 1PH822.) A bypass is available for 1PH822. with IP23 degree of protection and air guidance from the DE to the NDE. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 31 Preparations for use 4.4 Ensuring cooling Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23 Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55 External fan The code for the external fan is at the eleventh position of the order number. The order number - and therefore the installed external fan type - is specified on the rating plate. Machines with pipe connection You must mount and connect pipes and a fan of suitable type and dimensioning to machines that are intended for the connection of pipes and/or for operation with an external fan. Please observe the following when connecting pipes: Additional pressure drop in the system. Shipping covers on the ventilation openings must have been removed. 32 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan For machines with a pipe connection, the potential pressure drop inside the machine is given in the following table: Table 4-2 Type 1PH818. 1PH822. 1PH828. 4.5 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection Degree of pro tection Volume flow Pressure drop Flow resistance IP23 0.21 m3/s 450 Pa 10204 Ns2/m8 IP55 0.17 m3/s 550 Pa 19030 Ns2/m8 IP23 0.33 m /s 600 Pa 5510 Ns2/m8 IP55 0.31 m3/s 650 Pa 6760 Ns2/m8 IP23 0.52 m3/s 600 Pa 2220 Ns2/m8 IP55 0.42 m /s 600 Pa 3400 Ns2/m8 3 3 Interlock circuit for the external fan Interlock circuit for the external fan motor For machines with external fans, install an interlock circuit that prevents the main machine being switched on if the external fan is not operational. Force-ventilated 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors are equipped with electronically commutated motors (EC motor). The electronics of the external fan equipped with EC motor can be damaged as a result of voltage fluctuations. Supply the external fan with power from the line supply and not via a frequency converter. 4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option) If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the temperatures inside the machine. Install an interlock circuit that switches off the anti-condensation heating once the main machine is switched on. Only switch on the anti-condensation heating after the machine has been switched off. See also Switching on the machine (Page 98) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 33 Preparations for use 4.7 Thermal motor protection 4.7 Thermal motor protection The machine is equipped as standard with a temperature sensor, optionally with PTC thermistors to directly monitor the motor temperature in order to protect the machine against overload in operation. Plan a corresponding circuit for monitoring. See also Connecting the temperature sensor (Page 83) 4.8 Overheating during periodic duty NOTICE Non-periodic duty In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1. For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can result in damage to the machine. In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in DIN EN 600341. Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated. NOTICE EC fan control via an input signal The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of the setpoint signal it receives. Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors. Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit. 34 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.9 Noise emissions 4.9 Noise emissions Noise emissions During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the workplace, which can cause hearing damage. Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation. Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system. The following measures may help to reduce noise. - Covers - Noise insulation - Hearing protection measures 4.10 Rotational speed limit values Excessive rotational speed can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage. Avoid operation above the permissible speed by using the appropriate control function. Observe the speeds stamped on the rating plate. 4.11 System-inherent frequencies Excessively high vibration levels and system resonances can damage the machine set. Configure and match the system consisting of the foundation and machine set in such a way that no system resonances can arise and result in the permissible vibration levels being exceeded. The vibration values according to DIN ISO 10816-3 must not be exceeded. 4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply In the event of faults in the electrical connection during operation, excessive air gap torques can lead to additional mechanical torsional load on the line shaft. Risk of torsional stress on the drive train If the configuration does not correctly recognize the mechanical torsional loadings of the shaft assembly, this can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. When planning the system, consider the configuration data. The system planner is responsible for the entire drive train. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 35 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage 4.13 Transport and storage When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15) and the specifications contained in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. 4.13.1 Checking the delivery Checking the delivery for completeness The drive systems are put together on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the delivery, please check immediately whether the items delivered are in accordance with the accompanying documents. Siemens will not accept any claims relating to items missing from the delivery and which are submitted at a later date. Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately. Never commission a damaged motor. Report any apparent defects/missing components to the appropriate Siemens office immediately. These safety instructions are part of the scope of supply; keep them in a location where they can be easily accessed. 4.13.2 Lifting and transportation To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met: Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified. If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck suitable for the load. When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the machine is shown on the rating plate. When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate. - Comply with the specified spreading angles. - Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting plate. Lift the machine without jerking it. Acceleration a 0.4 g ( 4 m/s2 ) Velocity v 20 m/min Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting. 36 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage WARNING Transport for a different type of construction If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting. Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position. Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the rating plate. WARNING Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center. If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it. Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the carrying capacity of the lifting equipment. Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the hoisting hook above the center of gravity. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 37 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage There are two lifting eyebolts for horizontal transport of the motor. Always transport and lift the motor by the lifting eyebolts. Only lift the motor at the lifting eyebolts on the bearing end shields. To hoist the motor, in particular if there are built-on assemblies, use suitable cable-guidance or spreading equipment. NOTICE Damage to the terminal box The terminal box can be damaged when lifting without using suitable spreading equipment,. Only lift the machine using suitable spreading equipment. Pay attention to the lifting capacity of the hoisting gear. The weight of the motor is specified on the rating plate. Figure 4-4 38 Lifting the machine (schematic representation) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage Rotor shipping brace Machines ordered with the "Increased radial force" option are equipped with cylindrical-roller bearings and a rotor shipping brace. NOTICE Transport damage if the rotor shipping brace device is not used. The motor can be damaged if it is jolted during transport. This can result in material damage. Always transport the motor with the rotor shipping brace supplied. The rotor shipping brace must be attached during transportation. Only remove it before pushing on the drive element. If you transport the machine after the output transmission element has been pulled on, then you must axially fix the rotor in another way. Sleeve Shaft screw Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor Type Thread in the shaft end Tightening torque Preload 1PH818. M20 50 Nm 12 kN 1PH822. M20 50 Nm 12 kN 1PH828. M24 100 Nm 20 kN WARNING Lifting using the cooling water pipes The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor. The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 39 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage Lifting force-ventilated motors in type of construction IM V5 with side-mounted terminal boxes Proceed as follows if you wish to lift a machine with type of construction IM V5 and with sidemounted terminal box: 1. Screw off the external fan. 2. Screw in the eyebolts supplied and use these to lift the machine. 3. Screw on the external fan again after the work has been completed. 4.13.3 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows: 1. Allow the motor to cool down. 2. Remove the connections provided by the customer. 3. Fit the rotor shipping brace. 4. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor. 4.13.4 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows: 1. Allow the motor to cool down. 2. Remove the connections provided by the customer. 3. Drain the cooling-water system and purge it carefully with air. 4. Fit the rotor shipping brace, if present. 5. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields - for example - to transport and lift the motor. Note Store the rotor locking device Be sure to store the rotor locking device. It must be remounted for possible disassembly and transport. 40 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage 4.13.5 Transporting the machine set WARNING Falling down of the machine The lifting lugs on the machine are designed only for the weight of the machine. If a machine set is lifted and transported on a single machine, this can lead to mechanical failure of the lifting lug. The machine or machine set may fall. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Do not lift machine sets by attaching lifting tackle to the individual machines. Use only the equipment provided, e.g. the openings or lugs on the base plates, for transporting machine sets. Note the maximum capacity of the lifting lug. Note Place the machine in a secure and raised position In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and raised position. DANGER Standing under suspended loads If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised. 4.13.6 Storage You can store the machine for up to two years in dry, dust-free and vibration-free rooms without reducing the specified storage time. NOTICE Seizure damage to bearings If the motor is stored incorrectly, bearing damage can occur at standstill, e.g. brinelling, as a result of vibration or shock. Read the following storage instructions. Preparation Fit the rotor shipping brace. Apply a preserving agent, for example to external components such as shaft ends, if this has not already been applied in the factory. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 41 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage Storing indoors NOTICE Damage caused as a result of outdoor storage Storing the machine outdoors can result in it being damaged. Ensure that the machine is only stored in areas that comply with the following conditions. Store the motor in an area that meets the following criteria: - The room must be dry, dust-free, frost-free and vibration-free. The relative humidity of the air should be less than 60%. The temperature should not drop below 15 C in accordance with EN 60034-1. - The room must be well ventilated. - The room must provide protection against extreme weather conditions. - The air in the room must not contain any harmful gases. Protect the motor from shocks and humidity. Cover the motor properly. Avoid contact corrosion: - Every three months, remove the shipping brace. Rotate the shaft extension by hand. - Then reattach the rotor shipping brace. Protection against humidity If a dry storage area is not available, then take the following precautions: - Wrap the machine in a material that absorbs moisture. Then pack the machine in an airtight film. - Include several bags of desiccant in the seal-tight packaging. Check the desiccant and replace as required. - Place a humidity meter in the airtight packaging that indicates the level of humidity inside it. - Inspect the motor regularly. See also Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors (Page 44) 42 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage 4.13.7 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage NOTICE Bearing damage caused by vibration If storage conditions are inappropriate there is a risk of bearing seizure damage. This can result in material damage, such as damage to bearings caused by vibration. On machines that have been supplied with a rotor shipping brace, secure the rotor as per the notes on transportation. Protect the machine against strong radial vibrations, since the rotor shipping brace might not absorb these completely. NOTICE Bearing damage when being transported If the customer has already mounted parts, for example coupling, belt pulley, etc., the bearing can be damaged during transport. In this case, make sure that the customer uses a rotor shipping brace. Long-term storage If you are storing a machine for more than six months, you must check its condition every six months. Check the machine for damage. Carry out any necessary maintenance work. Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the machines are put back into service. Provide air-conditioning for the storage room. Condensation The following factors result in condensation in the machine: Significant fluctuations of the ambient temperature Direct sunshine Direct exposure to the weather High air humidity during storage Intermittent operation or load fluctuations in operation SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 43 Preparations for use 4.13 Transport and storage Water drain holes (option L12) Depending on the specific order, water drainage holes are provided in the bearing shields at the DE and NDE in the foot area and opposite the regreasing system. Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely. Shaft heights 180 and 225: The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes allows the condensation to drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be affected. Shaft height 280: There are no plugs in the water drain holes. The water must be able to drain away freely. The water drain holes only function when the motor is mounted horizontally for types of construction IM B3, IM B35 and IM B5. NOTICE Damage due to condensation If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the machine. Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely. 4.13.8 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors When the units are delivered, the high-grade steel cooling-water pipe system is not filled with cooling water. When you put the motor into storage after use, drain the cooling water ducts and purge with air to ensure that they are completely empty. For operation, add a maximum of 20 % to 30 % of an anti-freeze agent to the cooling water; use Antrifrogen N or Tyfocor, for example, as the anti-freeze. NOTICE Frost damage to the cooling circuit Damage may be caused to the cooling circuit if the cooling water freezes. If the ambient temperature falls below 0 C during operation add anti-freeze to the cooling water. 44 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.14 Converter operation 4.13.9 Protection against corrosion If the machine is stored in dry conditions, then apply the subsequently listed anti-corrosion measures: Storage up to six months: Apply a coat of corrosion protective compound to all accessible bare metal parts such as the exposed shaft extension, flange or machine feet. Storage for longer than six months: Apply a coat of long-term anti-corrosion agent to all accessible bare parts. Inspect the machine regularly and if necessary, apply an additional coating of corrosion protection. Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the machines are put back into service. 4.14 Converter operation 4.14.1 Connecting to a converter Selecting and connecting the cable Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well suited. The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable ends as short as possible. In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360 contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance, EMC glands at the cable entries. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 45 Preparations for use 4.14 Converter operation Measures to reduce bearing currents To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following precautions help to prevent bearing currents: Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low impedance for high-frequency currents No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine. - Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables. - Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360 contact). - Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as well as between the motor and the converter Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the output voltage 4.14.2 Converter input voltage The insulation system of SIMOTICS machines always complies with the requirements of stress category C (IVIC C = high stress). If voltage peaks higher than those specified according to IVIC C can occur, then please contact your Siemens partner: For a line supply voltage (converter input voltage) up to max. 480 V, and when controlled from a SINAMICS G/SINAMICS S converter with uncontrolled/controlled infeed: Comply with the guidelines for configuring motor and converter. For line voltages (converter input voltages) higher than 480 V, motors, which are ordered for converter operation, have an appropriate insulation system. Operation with a converter from another manufacturer: Comply with the permissible voltage peaks according to IEC 60034-18-41 in accordance with stress category C, dependent on the particular line voltage (converter input voltage) and the motor insulation system. NOTICE Material damage caused by an excessively high supply voltage The insulation system will be damaged if the supply voltage is too high for the insulation system. This can completely destroy the machine. Comply with the peak voltages as laid down in the guidelines above. 4.14.3 Insulated bearings for converter operation If the machine is operated with a low-voltage converter such as SINAMICS G150 / S150 / S120, then an insulated bearing and a speed encoder with insulated bearings (option) is mounted at the non-drive end. 46 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Preparations for use 4.14 Converter operation For 1PH818, the insulated bearings are optional; for 1PH822 and 1PH828, insulated bearings are standard. Comply with the plates on the machine relating to bearing insulation and possible bridges. Driven machine Motor Insulated bearings Insulated tachometer fitting Coupling Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive NOTICE Bearing damage The bearing insulation must not be bridged. Bearing currents can damage bearings. Also when performing subsequent installation work, e.g. installing an automatic lubrication system or a non-insulated vibration sensor, ensure the bearing insulation is not bridged. Contact your Service Center, if necessary. See also Service and Support (Page 161) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 47 Preparations for use 4.14 Converter operation 48 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 5 Mounting 5.1 Safety instructions for mounting Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions. Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations. When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. See also Safety information (Page 15) Injury and material damage caused by inappropriate fastening material If screws of an incorrect property class have been selected or if they have been fastened to an incorrect tightening torque, they may break or become loose. This will cause the machine to move, which could damage the bearings. The rotor could smash into the machine enclosure and machine parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Comply with the required property classes for screwed connections. Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques. Injury and material damage caused by incorrect machine alignment If the machine has not been properly aligned, this will mean the fastening parts are subjected to stress/distortion. Screws may become loose or break, the machine will move, machine parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Carefully align the machine to the driven machine. Material damage caused by improper handling Mounting parts such as temperature sensors or speed sensors are attached to the machine and could be ripped off or destroyed as a result of improper handling. This could lead to machine malfunctions, extending even to total loss of the machine. Where necessary, use suitable steps when performing installation work on the machine. Do not stand on cables or attachments during installation. Do not use attachments as steps. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 49 Mounting 5.2 Preparing for installation Damage to mounted parts and components as a result of high temperatures The motor components get very hot during operation. High temperatures can damage parts mounted by customers, such as cables manufactured out of materials that are not heat resistant. Temperature-sensitive parts must not come into contact with or be attached to components mounted on the machine. Only use heat-resistant mounting parts. The connecting cables and cable entries must be suitable for the particular application. Loss of conformity with European directives In the delivery state, the machine corresponds to the requirements of the European directives. Unauthorized changes or modifications to the machine lead to the loss of conformity with European Directives and the loss of the associated warranty. 5.2 Preparing for installation 5.2.1 Requirements for installation The following requirements must be satisfied prior to starting installation work: Staff have access to the operating and installation instructions. The machine is unpacked and ready for mounting at the installation location. Measure the insulation resistance of the winding before starting any installation work. If the insulation resistance lies below the specified value, take appropriate remedial measures. These remedial measures may necessitate the machine being removed again and transported. 5.2.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the polarization index at the following times: Before starting up a machine for the first time After an extended period in storage or downtime Within the scope of maintenance work The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation: Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated? Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture? 50 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.2 Preparing for installation As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding: Can the machine be put into operation? Must the windings be cleaned or dried? Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here: "Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51) 5.2.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index WARNING Hazardous voltage at the terminals During and immediately after measuring the insulation resistance or the polarization index (PI) of the stator winding, hazardous voltages may be present at some of the terminals. Contact with these can result in death, serious injury or material damage. If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be delivered. Discharge the winding after measurement until the risk is eliminated, e.g. using the following measures: - Connect the terminals with the ground potential until the recharge voltage drops to a non-hazardous level - Attach the connection cable. Measure the insulation resistance 1. Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the operating manual for the insulation resistance meter you are going to use. 2. Short-circuit the ends of the temperature sensor cables before applying the test voltage. If the test voltage is connected to only one temperature sensor terminal, the temperature sensor will be destroyed. 3. Make sure that no power cables are connected. 4. Measure the winding temperature and the insulation resistance of the winding in relation to the machine enclosure. The winding temperature should not exceed 40 C during the measurement. Convert the measured insulation resistances in accordance with the formula to the reference temperature of 40 C. This thereby ensures that the minimum values specified can be compared. 5. Read out the insulation resistance one minute after applying the measuring voltage. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 51 Mounting 5.2 Preparing for installation Limit values for the stator winding insulation resistance The following table specifies the measuring voltage and limit values for the insulation resistance. These values correspond to IEEE 432000 recommendations. Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40 C UN V Umeas V M U 1000 500 5 1000 U 2500 500 (max. 1000) 100 2500 < U 5000 1000 (max. 2500) 5000 < U 12000 2500 (max. 5000) U > 12000 5000 (max. 10000) RC Urated = rated voltage, see the rating plate Umeas = DC measuring voltage RC = minimum insulation resistance at a reference temperature of 40 C Conversion to the reference temperature When measuring with winding temperatures other than 40 C, convert the measuring value to the reference temperature of 40 C according to the following equations from IEEE 43-2000. (1) RC = KT * RT (2) KT = (0.5) (40-T)/10 RC Insulation resistance converted to 40 C reference temperature KT Temperature coefficient according to equation (2) RT Measured insulation resistance for measuring/winding temperature T in C 40 Reference temperature in C 10 Halving/doubling of the insulation resistance with 10 K T Measuring/winding temperature in C In this case, doubling or halving the insulation resistance at a temperature change of 10 K is used as the basis. The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K. The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K. 52 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.2 Preparing for installation For a winding temperature of approx. 25 C, the minimum insulation resistances are 20 M (U 1000 V) or 300 M (U > 1000 V). The values apply for the complete winding to ground. Twice the minimum values apply to the measurement of individual assemblies. Dry, new windings have an insulation resistance of between 100 and 2000 M, or possibly even higher values. An insulation resistance value close to the minimum value could be due to moisture and/or dirt accumulation. The size of the winding, the rated voltage and other characteristics affect the insulation resistance and may need to be taken into account when determining measures. Over its operating lifetime, the motor winding insulation resistance can drop due to ambient and operational influences. Calculate the critical insulation resistance value depending on the rated voltage by multiplying the rated voltage (kV) by the specific critical resistance value. Convert the value for the current winding temperature at the time of measurement, see above table. Measuring the polarization index 1. To determine the polarization index, measure the insulation resistances after one minute and ten minutes. 2. Express the measured values as a ratio: PI = Rinsul 10 min / Rinsul 1 min Many measuring devices display these values automatically following the measurement. For insulation resistances > 5000 M, the measurement of the PI is no longer meaningful and consequently not included in the assessment. R(10 min) / R(1 min) Assessment 2 Insulation in good condition <2 Dependent on the complete diagnosis of the insulation NOTICE Damage to insulation If the critical insulation resistance is reached or undershot, this can damage the insulation and cause voltage flashovers. Contact the service center (Page 161). If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must subsequently check the insulation resistance at shorter intervals. Limit values of the anti-condensation heating insulation resistance The insulation resistance of the anti-condensation heating with respect to the machine housing should not be lower than 1 M when measured at 500 V DC. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 53 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it 5.2.4 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3) Ensure that the foundation faces are flat and clean. Check the dimensions of the mounting-foot holes. 5.2.5 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting) Clean the flange before installation, and make sure that the flange face is flat and free of contaminations. Check the geometry of the flange. 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it 5.3.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment Detailed specialist knowledge of the following measures is required in order to correctly align and securely fit the equipment. Preparing the foundation Selecting and mounting the coupling Measuring the concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerances Positioning the machine If you are not familiar with the prescribed measures and procedures, then you can make use of the services offered by the local Service Center (Page 161). 5.3.2 Checking the load handling attachments Inspect the load handling attachments such as the load stands, lifting eyes and ring bolts and also the lifting gear, before lifting the machine: Inspect the load handling attachments on the machine for possible damage. Replace any load handling attachments that are found to be damaged. Check before use that the load handling attachments are correctly secured. When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated capacity. Check these before using them. WARNING The machine can be dropped If the load handling attachments and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured, the machine may be dropped during lifting. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use. 54 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it 5.3.3 Removing anti-corrosion protection Machined, bare metallic surfaces of the motor, such as the shaft end, fitted key, foot and flange surfaces, are treated with an anti-corrosion agent. 1. Remove this layer of anti-corrosion agent from the mounting surfaces of the motor by wiping it away with an absorbent cloth or paper sheet. NOTICE Damage to the machine surface Using metal objects such as scrapers, spatulas, or plates to remove the anti-corrosion protection could result in damage to the surfaces of the machine parts. 2. Then lightly oil the bare surfaces again. 5.3.4 Mounting the output elements Type of balancing The rotor is dynamically balanced. For shaft extensions with featherkeys, the balancing type is specified using the following coding on the face of the drive end of the shaft: H Balancing with half a feather key F Balancing with a full feather key N Balancing with a plain shaft - no keyway Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 55 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it Pushing on the power output elements Preconditions The coupling and/or the output element must be appropriately dimensioned for the operating case at hand. Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the balancing type of the transmission element correctly matches the type of balance of the rotor. Use only ready drilled and balanced transmission elements. Check the hole diameters and the balancing status before pulling them on. Thoroughly clean the shaft extension. Fitting Warm up the transmission elements to expand them before pulling them on. Select the temperature difference for the heating process to suit the coupling diameter, fit and material. Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Power output elements may only be pushed on or pulled off with the correct equipment. The output element must be pulled on in one continuous operation via the front thread holes in the shaft or pulled on by hand. Do not strike it with a hammer, as this would damage the bearings. Shaft extensions with feather key To maintain the balancing quality, you have the following options: If the output element is shorter than the feather key for balancing type "H": Machine off the section of feather key protruding from the shaft contour and output element in order to maintain the balance quality. If the output element is mounted up to the shaft shoulder for motors with full-key balancing "F", or if the output element is longer than the motor shaft extension: When balancing the coupling or the belt pulley, take into account that the feather key does not take up all of the hub groove. Danger when feather keys are flung out The feather key is only secured to prevent it falling out during transport. The feather key may be flung out if the motor is operated without fitted transmission elements, such as coupling, etc. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Only operate the motor with the transmission element pulled on. For test operation or when commissioning without transmission element, carefully secure the feather key using a suitable locking element. When doing this, take into account the type of machine balancing. 56 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it Note Type of balancing In the case of shaft extensions with feather keys, the type of balancing is also included on the rating plate next to the CE mark. 5.3.5 Lifting and transporting the machine To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met: Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified. If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck suitable for the load. When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the machine is shown on the rating plate. When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate. - Comply with the specified spreading angles. - Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting plate. Lift the machine without jerking it. Acceleration a 0.4 g ( 4 m/s2 ) Velocity v 20 m/min Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting. WARNING Transport for a different type of construction If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting. Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position. Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the rating plate. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 57 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it WARNING Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center. If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it. Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the carrying capacity of the lifting equipment. Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the hoisting hook above the center of gravity. Note Place the machine in a secure and raised position In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and raised position. DANGER Standing under suspended loads If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised. NOTICE Damage due to condensation If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the machine. Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely. 5.3.6 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor) In the bearing shields at the DE and NDE, a water drain hole is situated in the foot area and another opposite the regreasing device. 58 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it Figure 5-2 Water drain holes Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely. The plug that has been inserted into the water drain holes allows the condensation to drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be affected. If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161). 5.3.7 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12) If the machine is ordered with option L12, then for types 1PH818. and 1PH822., a water drain hole with plugs is provided in the DE and NDE bearing shields. For type 1PH828., there are water drain holes without plugs at the DE and NDE. Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 59 Mounting 5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely. The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes allows the condensation to drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be affected. If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161). 5.3.8 Putting the machine down Requirements The following preconditions must be satisfied before setting down the machine at the installation location: The mating faces must be clean. The anti-corrosion protection paint has been removed from the mating faces, such as the machine mounting feet, flange, ... There is no condensation present within the machine. Setting down the machine Set down the machine slowly and carefully at the installation location to avoid any impact. 5.3.9 Roughly aligning the machine Requirement The transmission element such as a coupling half has already been pulled on. Roughly aligning the machine For horizontal positioning, push the motor sideways across the foundation. When doing so, ensure that the axial position is maintained. 60 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.4 Installing the machine 5.4 Installing the machine 5.4.1 Selecting fixing screws Unless specified otherwise, use mounting bolts with at least strength class 8.8 to ISO 8981. In this way you guarantee that the machine is securely mounted and the forces can be transferred through the torque. Take into account the maximum forces occurring in the case of a fault such as short circuit or system transfers in phase opposition. - When selecting the bolts - When designing the foundation See also Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163) 5.4.2 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation: Stable foundation design Precise alignment of the machine Correct balancing of parts to be fitted to the shaft end. Maintaining the vibration velocity according to ISO 108163 5.4.3 Vibration severity Due to the influencing variables listed below, the vibration response of the system at the site of operation can lead to increased vibration severity at the motor: Transmission elements Assembly conditions Alignment and installation Effects of external vibrations Under certain circumstances, the rotor may have to be balanced completely with the output element. Please take care to ensure that the vibration severity specified in accordance with ISO 10816 is not exceeded at the defined measuring points on the motor. By doing this, you can ensure problem-free operation and a long service life. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 61 Mounting 5.4 Installing the machine Maximum permitted vibration severity The values for the maximum permitted radial and axial vibration severity must both be maintained. Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity Vibration frequency Vibration values1) < 6.3 Hz Vibration displacement s 0.25 mm 6.3 to 63 Hz Vibration velocity vrms 7.1 mm/s > 63 Hz Vibration acceleration a 4.0 m/s2 Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity Vibration acceleration vrms = 7.1 mm/s apeak = 3.55 m/s2 V Vt P P D P Vibration velocity Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and vibration acceleration To measure the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must fulfill the requirements of ISO 2954. The vibration acceleration must be measured as a peak value in the time domain in a frequency band of 10 to 2000 Hz. If excitation in excess of 2000 Hz (e.g. gear tooth meshing frequencies) is to be expected, then you must adapt the measuring range accordingly. This does not alter the maximum permissible values. 62 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.4 Installing the machine 5.4.4 Aligning to the driven machine Vertical and horizontal alignment The following measures are required in order to compensate any radial offset at the coupling and to horizontally adjust the motor with respect to the driven machine: The contact surfaces of the motor feet must lie on one plane. Place shims under the motor feet to position it vertically and to prevent any stress/distortion. The number of shims should be kept as low as possible, so use as few thicker shims as possible, instead of several thinner shims. Shift the motor to the side on the foundation for horizontal positioning. Pay attention to maintaining the axial position. When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the coupling. Alignment accuracy Note Alignment accuracy Remember to take account of data concerning the alignment accuracy of the driven load and the coupling. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 63 Mounting 5.4 Installing the machine 1. Align the motors with coupling output in such a manner that the center lines of the shafts are parallel with no offset. This ensures that no additional forces affect their bearings during operation. 2. Perform the fine adjustments with plates under the entire motor foot. [ ' \ Figure 5-5 Table 5-4 64 Aligning the motor Permissible deviations when aligning the motor Permissible deviations Radial shaft offset [x] Axial shaft offset [y] Flexible coupling 0.05 mm 0.05 mm SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Mounting 5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply 5.4.5 Mounting the motor Fixing by means of motor feet Select foot screws as per ISO 898-1 in compliance with the loading conditions and machine type: Use foot screws with a minimum property class of 8.8. Pin the mounting feet to the customer foundation for motors with types of construction B6, B7, B8, V5 and V6. Type Foot screw size 1PH818. M12 1PH822. M16 1PH828. M20 Flange mounting The flange is only used to transfer the torque. Due to the empty weight or as a result of vibrations that arise if the flange is too soft, the motor can be damaged if it is only fastened via the flange. 1. Fasten the flange-mounted motors via a stable motor suspension and support them via the end shield feet (foot flange type of construction). 2. During commissioning, ensure that the permitted vibration values are maintained in accordance with ISO 108163. If the motor is to be only flange mounted, then the maximum speed nmax is reduced for rigid foundations according to the following table: Type Maximum speed nmax 1PH818. 3000 1/min 1PH822. 2500 1/min 1PH828. 2000 1/min Maximum speed for a rigid foundation and flange mounting 5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply The inlet and outlet sockets for the cooling water supply are situated on the non-drive end in the bearing shield area. On the bearing shield, there are two hexagonal couplers with a female thread, which are each screwed onto a washer: At shaft heights of 180 and 225, hexagonal couplers with 3/8" female threads are used, at a shaft height of 280 1/2" female threads are used. 1. Only use valves, fittings and cooling water pipes made of rust-proof, stainless steel in the cooling system. 2. Make sure that the cooling water meets the required cooling water specification, see section headed "Cooling Water Quality" (Page 29). SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 65 Mounting 5.6 Refitting the external fan 3. Make sure that the appropriate volume of cooling water is available, see Rating Plate (Page 21). 4. Hold the hexagon head with an open-ended wrench while you screw in the water pipes. 5. Screw the cooling water pipes into the female thread. You can connect the inlet and outlet as required. NOTICE Securing the hexagonal couplers The hexagonal couplers are connected directly to the water pipes inside the machine. Applying excessive torque when screwing in can damage the pipe system. Hold the couplers steady with an open-ended wrench when you screw in the water pipes. 6. Ensure that the maximum permissible operating pressure does not exceed 6 bar. The pressure drop is determined by the machine type and the shaft height: Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop Type 5.6 Flow rate Pressure drop 1PH8 184 15 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 186 15 l/min 0.7 bar 1PH8 224 20 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 226 20 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 228 20 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 284 35 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 286 35 l/min 0.6 bar 1PH8 288 35 l/min 0.6 bar Refitting the external fan Subsequently changing the air flow direction from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried out by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161). 66 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.1 6 Safety instructions for the electrical connection Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions. Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations. When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. See also Safety information (Page 15) Material damage as a result of connection parts coming loose If you use fixing elements made from the wrong material or apply the wrong tightening torque, this could impair current transfer or cause connecting parts to become loose. This could result in material damage to the machine or even in total failure, which could in turn lead indirectly to material damage to the system. Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques. Observe any specifications regarding the materials from which fixing elements must be made. When performing servicing, check the fastenings. See also Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163) Electrostatically sensitive devices The DRIVE-CLiQ interface contains components that are susceptible to electrostatic charging. Touching connections with electrostatically charged hands or tools can cause malfunctions. Maintain the ESD protective measures (Page 18) as well as the 5 safety rules (Page 15). Note Service Center If you require support when electrically connecting up the machine, please contact the Service Center (Page 161). SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 67 Electrical connection 6.2 Preparation 6.2 Preparation 6.2.1 Selecting cables Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables: Rated current Rated voltage If required, service factor System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable crosssection as defined by required length of cable, etc. Configuration notes Requirements according to IEC/EN 602041 6.2.2 Connect up the ground conductor The grounding conductor of the motor must be in full conformance with the installation regulations, e.g. in accordance with IEC/EN 60204-1. Connect the ground conductor to the end shield of the motor. There is a fixing lug for the ground conductor at the designated connection point. - The fixing lug is suitable for grounding high-frequency currents using HF ribbon cable with appropriately formed conductor ends. When making connections, ensure the following: - the connecting surface is bare and protected against corrosion using a suitable substance, e.g. acid-free Vaseline - the flat and spring washers are located under the bolt head. Figure 6-1 68 Terminal lug for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting Figure 6-2 6.3 Terminal lug for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor Connecting Depending on the version, different terminal boxes may be installed on the machine. Depending on the terminal box, different cable entries and options for the cable connection are possible. You can identify the terminal box installed on the machine via the illustrations in the following chapters. 6.3.1 Circuit diagram Data on the connection and connecting the motor winding can be found in the circuit diagram in the cover of the terminal box. 6.3.2 Terminal designation According to IEC / EN 600348, the following basic definitions apply to the terminal designations for 3-phase machines: Table 6-1 1 U Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example 1 - 1 Designation x Index for pole assignment for pole-changing machines where applicable. A lower index signifies a lower speed. Special case for split winding. x Phase designation U, V, W x Index for winding start (1) or end (2) or if there is more than one connection per winding x Additional indices for cases in which it is obligatory to connect parallel power feed cables to several terminals with otherwise identical designations SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 69 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting 6.3.3 Laying cables Lay the cables in accordance with IEC/EN 60364-5-52. Use EMC cable glands for fixed cables. Screw the EMC cable glands into the threaded holes in the entry plate, which can be unscrewed. Use shielded cables whose shields are conductively connected to a large area of the terminal box of the motor via EMC cable glands. In the case of aluminum connecting bars, insert a steel washer between the cable lug and the connecting bar. This prevents contact corrosion. Arrange the exposed connecting cables in the terminal box so that the PE conductor has excess length and the insulation of the cable strands cannot be damaged. Close off unused bushings with a metal threaded plug. This is the way to achieve a high frequency-proof shielding. 6.3.4 Electrical connection data Cable entry and technical connection data depend on the mounted terminal box. You can find more information on the terminal box that is mounted in the ordering documentation or in the catalog. 1XB7 322 70 1XB7 422 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting 1XB7 700 main terminal ground terminal Table 6-2 signal connection Data for electrical connection Terminal box type Cable entry 1XB7 322 1XB7 422 1XB7 700 1XB7 712 (*) 2 x M50 x 1.5 2 x M63 x 1.5 3 x M75 x 1.5 4 x M75 x 1.5 38 mm 53 mm 68 mm 68 mm Max. poss. cable outer diameter Number of main terminals Max. cross-section per terminal Max. current per terminal 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x 3 x M12 3 x 4 x M16 2 x 50 mm2 2 x 70 mm2 3 x 150 mm2 4 x 185 mm2 210 A 270 A 700 A 1150 A 4 x M6 4 x M8 Terminal strip 4 x M16 Number of ground terminals 1XB7 712 (*) signal connection terminal Current carrying capacity based on IEC / EN 60204-1 or IEC / EN 60364-5-32 6.3.5 Connection with cable lugs 1. To connect the cables to the main terminals, select cable lugs that match the necessary cable cross-section and appropriate screw size. The connectable cable cross section is determined by the cable lug size for example. - Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46234 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2, - Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46235 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2. Observe the possible outer diameter of the connecting cable in the chapter entitled "Electrical connection data". Connect only one conductor per cable lug. 2. Remove the insulation from the conductor ends so that the remaining insulation is almost long enough to reach the cable lug. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 71 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting 3. Fasten the cable lug to the end of the conductor correctly, e.g. by crimping. 4. If necessary, insulate the cable lugs in order to maintain the minimum clearances of 10 mm and the 20 mm creepage distance, which are normally available. The tightening torque for contact nuts and fixing screws depends on the size of the screw, see Case A in the table in Chapter Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163). Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 322 / 1XB7 422 Customer connecting cable Internal motor connecting cable Copper spacer ring Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 700 / 1XB7 712 72 Customer connecting cable Connection bar SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting See also Electrical connection data (Page 70) 6.3.6 Connecting aluminum conductors If you are using aluminum conductors, comply in addition with the following: Use only cable lugs that are suitable for connecting aluminum conductors. Immediately before inserting the aluminum conductor, remove the oxide layer from the contact areas on the conductor and/or the mating piece, by brushing or filing. Then grease the contact areas immediately using neutral vaseline in order to avoid reoxidation. NOTICE Aluminum flow due to contact pressure Aluminum flows following installation due to the contact pressure. The connection with the clamping nuts can loosen as a result. The contact resistance would increase and the current-carrying impeded; as a consequence the terminal box and the surrounding components could burn. This could result in material damage to the machine or even in total failure, which could in turn lead to indirect material damage to the system. Retighten the clamping nuts after approximately 24 hours and then again after approximately four weeks. Make sure that the terminals are de-energized before you tighten the nuts. 6.3.7 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover The sealing face of the terminal box cover is formed by the terminal box enclosure and the cable entry element. Therefore make sure these parts are correctly aligned, so as to ensure the seal and hence the degree of protection. Align the cable entry support and the cable entry plate to the terminal box enclosure so that the sealing surface between the terminal box and the terminal box cover form a flat face. There must be no steps in the sealing area. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 73 Electrical connection 6.3 Connecting 6.3.8 Performing connection operations 1. Before closing the terminal box, please check that: - The electrical connections in the terminal box are tight and are in full compliance with the specifications above. - The required clearances in air of 10 mm are maintained. - Wire ends do not protrude. - The inside of the terminal box is clean and free of any cable debris. - All seals and sealing surfaces are undamaged. - The connecting cables are arranged so that they do not come into contact with the machine, and the cable insulation cannot be damaged. - unused entry points are sealed. The sealing elements are firmly screwed in, i.e. they can only be removed with a tool. - The cable/conductor glands are fitted compliant with the specifications regarding degree of protection, cable routing type, permissible cable diameter etc. 2. Then close the terminal box with the terminal box cover fixing screws. See also Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163) 6.3.9 Internal equipotential bonding The internal equipotential bonding between the grounding terminal in the box enclosure and the motor frame is established through the terminal box retaining bolts. The contact locations underneath the bolt heads are bare metal and protected against corrosion. The standard cover fixing screws are sufficient for equipotential bonding between the terminal box cover and terminal box housing. Note Connecting points are available at the frame or bearing end shield to connect an external protective conductor or potential bonding connector. See also Connect up the ground conductor (Page 68) 74 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 6.4.1 Selecting cables Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables for the auxiliary circuits: Rated current Rated voltage System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable crosssection as defined by required length of cable, etc. Requirements according to IEC/EN 602041 6.4.2 Connecting an external fan Preconditions Only use cables that comply with the relevant installation regulations regarding voltage, current, insulation material, and load-carrying capacity. Before connecting the device, make sure that the line voltage matches the device voltage. Check whether the data on the fan rating plate matches the connection data. Cable glands are not included in the scope of supply. Close unused cable entries, otherwise, the degree of protection is not maintained. The line voltage corresponds to the quality attributes laid down in DIN EN 50160 and the defined standard voltages laid down in DIN IEC 60038. Procedure 1. Open the terminal box of the external fan and route the cables into it. The cables are not included in the scope of supply. 2. Connect the protective conductor (PE). 3. Connect the other cables to the relevant terminals, refer to the connection diagram in the terminal box. Connection cables must not be subject to excessive tensile stress. Note For fans equipped with EC motor, the fan motor starts with a delay after the line voltage is connected. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 75 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits Protection against humidity Protect the external fan against moisture. Water must not be allowed to run along the cables and into the terminal box of the external fan. Use suitable cables at the connection cable gland on the terminal box. Attach the terminal box cover of the external fan orrectly and completely. WARNING Voltages at the internal motor connections The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or changes to the fan. Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it. Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the external fan is not in operation. - After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts up automatically again when the voltage is restored. - The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent function. See also Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33) NOTICE Overheating when the factory-installed jumper is removed If the company operating the plant or system removes the jumper in the EC fan terminal box (which was inserted in the factory), then that company becomes responsible for the functional safety of the drive. The motor can overheat. This can result in material damage. Carefully follow the safety instructions. Supply values 76 Type Option Fan Supply voltage Power consumption* 1PH818. Standard Single-phase EC 1~ AC 200 ... 277 V (10 %) 1.1 A ... 1.3 A 1PH818. L76 Three-phase EC 3~ AC 380 ... 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) 1PH822. Standard Single-phase EC 1~ AC 200 ... 277 V (10 %) 50/60 Hz 10 % 0.44 A ... 0.5 A 50/60 Hz 10 % 2.0 A ... 2.3 A 50/60 Hz 10 % SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 1PH822. 1PH828. L76 Standard Three-phase EC 3~ AC 380 ... 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) Three-phase EC 3~ AC 380 ... 480 V (-5 %/+10 %) 0.75 A ... 0.9 A 50/60 Hz 10 % 0.75 A ... 0.9 A 50/60 Hz 10 % Connection values for external fans * For EC fans, as a result of the electronic input circuitry, the current drawn can briefly reach four times the specified current. See also Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249) 6.4.2.1 Connecting an EC external fan The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box. If necessary, you can rotate the external fan through 90. Figure 6-3 External fan terminal box (schematic representation) NOTICE Short circuit due to standing water Water that accumulates at the cable glands can result in a short circuit. It is not permissible that the cable outlet points upward. Rotate the terminal box cover of the external fan through 180. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 77 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits See also Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33) 6.4.2.2 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75) The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box. Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box (schematic representation) NOTICE An external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation The external fan is only designed for one direction of rotation corresponding to the direction of rotation arrow. Operation with the wrong direction of rotation can cause overheating or destruction of the motor. Ensure that the external fan is operated in the proper direction of rotation. The direction-ofrotation arrow and the direction of movement of the fan impeller are indicated on the rear side of the blower. If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the external fan terminal box. See also Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33) 78 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 6.4.2.3 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75) Supply values The external fan with three-phase motor has a terminal box that is mounted on the external fan motor. Air-flow direction 3 AC 400 V 3 AC 400 V / 50 Hz / 60 Hz (1) (10 %) (10 %) 3 AC 480 V Sound pressure level LpA / 60 Hz (1) (1 m) (+5 %, -10 %) Motor + external fan unit 50 Hz operation Air flow rate at 50 Hz, ap prox. Tolerance +3 dB Rated pulse frequency 2 kHz [A] [A] [A] [dB] [m3/s] 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.17 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.31 1PH8 forced ventilation degree of protection IP55, option L75 1PH818.-...0.-...1-Z DE NDE 1PH818.-...1.-...1-Z NDE DE 1PH822.-...0.-...1-Z DE NDE 1PH822.-...1.-...1-Z NDE DE 1PH8 open-circuit ventilated, degree of protection IP23, option L75 1PH818.-...3.-...1-Z DE NDE 1PH818.-...4.-...1-Z NDE DE 1PH822.-...3.-...1-Z DE NDE 1PH822.-...4.-...1-Z NDE DE 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.21 2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.33 (1) 60 Hz operation only permissible with throttle plate (2) Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 5000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 3500 rpm (3) Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 3000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 2000 rpm 1. Connect the power supply in the terminal box. The terminal diagram is in the terminal box cover. Terminal box of the external fan Cable entry SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 79 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits NOTICE Incorrect direction of rotation The external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation. Operation with the wrong direction of rotation can destroy the motor. If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the terminal box. The direction of rotation arrow and the direction of rotation of the fan impeller can be seen at the rear of the fan. 6.4.2.4 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75) When operated from a 60 Hz line supply, you require the air discharge throttle plate provided in the terminal box. NOTICE Operation without air discharge throttle plate The external fan motor can be damaged if it is operated on a 60 Hz line supply without air discharge throttle plate. 80 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits Screw the air discharge throttle plate to the air discharge mesh. Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate Air discharge throttle metal plate Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE) Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate Air discharge throttle metal plate Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 81 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 6.4.3 Connecting the speed encoder The speed encoder is connected at the terminal box using a plug connection . This is located on the terminal box enclosure. Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection Note The plug-in connection may differ from the standard layout in the case of special orders. For versions without speed encoder, connection thread M16x1.5 is located here. Connecting a speed encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ The signal connection between the motor and the converter is established via the DRIVECLiQ cable MOTIONCONNECT. Always use prefabricated cables from Siemens. These cables reduce the mounting/ installation time and costs and increase operational reliability. Push the connector of the DRIVECLiQ cable into the socket until the catch spring latches into place. Pay attention to the coding of the connector. Cable outlet directions The sensor module is mounted on the motor terminal box. The sensor module can be rotated through approximately 235. You can change the cable outlet directions by rotating the sensor module, as shown in the diagram below. NOTICE Damage to the sensor module You can damage the sensor module if you turn it with a pipe wrench, a hammer, or similar tools. Turn the sensor module by hand. The typical torque is approx. 4 ... 8 Nm. 82 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits Figure 6-8 r Sensor Module mounted on the terminal box NOTICE Modifying the cable outlet direction Changing the cable outlet direction by any improper means will damage the connecting cables. The permissible rotation range must not be exceeded. A maximum of ten changes to the rotation angle of the Sensor Module are permissible within the rotation range. 6.4.4 Connect the holding brake Information for electrically connecting the holding brake can be found in the operating instructions supplied by the manufacturer in the (Page 169) appendix. 6.4.5 Connecting the temperature sensor The temperature sensor is connected to the signal connector together with the speed encoder signal. For the version without speed encoder, the temperature sensor is connected at the terminal strip. The motor has a reserve temperature sensor, which is also connected at the auxiliary terminal strip. Reconnect the temperature sensor as needed, e.g. if the previous temperature sensor fails. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 83 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits WARNING Risk of electric shock The insulation of the temperature sensors for the winding monitoring with respect to the winding is implemented according to the requirements for basic insulation. The temperature sensor connections are located in terminal boxes, safe to touch - and have no protective separation. This is the reason that in the case of a fault, a hazardous voltage can be present at the measuring sensor cable. When touched, this can result in death, severe bodily injury and material damage. When connecting the temperature sensor to external temperature monitoring devices, when required, apply additional measures to fully comply with the requirements set out in IEC 60664-1 or IEC 61800-5-1 "Hazard due to electric shock". 6.4.6 Connecting to a converter Selecting and connecting the cable Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well suited. The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable ends as short as possible. In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360 contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance, EMC glands at the cable entries. Measures to reduce bearing currents To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following precautions help to prevent bearing currents: Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low impedance for high-frequency currents No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine. - Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables. - Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360 contact). - Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as well as between the motor and the converter Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the output voltage 84 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 6.4.7 Converter operation on a grounded network NOTICE Damage resulting from protective conductor currents When the machine is operated on a converter with current limiter, but without ground-fault monitoring, protective conductor currents of up to 1.7 times the external conductor current can arise if there is a ground fault on the output side. Neither the PE conductors of normally rated multi-core connecting cables nor the PE connecting points of normal terminal boxes are suitable for this purpose. Material damage can result. Use an appropriately sized PE conductor. Connect the PE conductor to the grounding terminal on the motor enclosure. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 85 Electrical connection 6.4 Auxiliary circuits 86 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Commissioning 7 Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations. When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. See also Safety information (Page 15) WARNING Magnetic field when the holding brake is open If the motor is equipped with a holding brake, then the shaft extension is magnetized when the holding brake is open, i.e. if a voltage is connected to it. Magnetic objects will then be suddenly attracted as a result of this magnetic field. This can result in death, severe injury or material damage. Working close to the shaft extension is only permissible in exceptional, justified cases. Clear access rules must be applied and complied with corresponding to magnetic fields at the workplace. Clearly mark the boundaries of the areas where standing is permitted. People who need to use electronic or magnetic medical aids such as pacemakers, hearing aids, implants or similar devices, are at particularly high risk. Such persons must undergo an occupational health assessment. Observe the following measures. Personal protective measures Ensure that you never wear or carry any of the following objects and that they are kept a safe distance from the machine: - All kinds of magnetic metal parts such as, keys, glasses, tools, knives, scissors, tape measures, etc. - Magnetic jewelry such as rings, chains, needles, watches, etc. - Electronic devices and data carriers such as service cards, check cards, credit cards, calculators, cell phones, etc. - Wallets or other iron-containing objects - Electrically conductive foreign bodies Do not use any magnetic tools or lifting devices. Wear only occupational safety items without magnetic metal parts, e.g. occupational safety shoes with non-magnetic protective caps and soles. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 87 Commissioning 7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index Keep your shoes and clothing free from chips and waste containing iron. Exercise caution when installing accessories. Ensure that no parts fall into the inside of the machine. Do not perform any cutting at the machine, e.g. drilling threaded holes. Any exceptions require written approval from the manufacturer. See also The 5 safety rules (Page 15) 7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the polarization index at the following times: Before starting up a machine for the first time After an extended period in storage or downtime Within the scope of maintenance work The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation: Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated? Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture? As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding: Can the machine be put into operation? Must the windings be cleaned or dried? Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here: "Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51) NOTICE Damage to the converter The electronics of the integrated converter can be destroyed when measuring the insulation resistance at the EC external fan. Do not measure the insulation resistance of the EC external fan. More information can be found in the instructions of the EC external fan. 88 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Commissioning 7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning 7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning Once the system has been correctly installed, you should check the following prior to commissioning: Note Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning The following list of checks to be performed prior to commissioning does not claim to be complete. It may be necessary to perform further checks and tests in accordance with the specific situation on-site. The machine is undamaged. The machine has been correctly installed and aligned, the transmission elements are correctly balanced and adjusted. All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to the specified tightening torques. The operating conditions match the data provided in accordance with the technical documentation, such as degree of protection, ambient temperature, etc.. Moving parts such as the coupling move freely. All touch protection measures for moving and live parts have been taken. For test operation or when commissioning without output element, carefully secure the feather key using a suitable security element. When doing this, take into account the balancing type of the motor. If the second shaft extension is not in use, its feather key is secured to prevent it from being thrown out, and cut back to roughly half its length if the rotor has balancing type "H" (standard type). The unused shaft extension is covered and protected against accidental contact. The rotor can spin without coming into contact with the stator. The bearing insulation is not bridged. Electrical connection The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been made correctly. The machine is connected so that it rotates in the direction specified. Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the motor cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified in the technical data. For this purpose, compare the data on the rating plate or, if necessary, the system-specific documentation. The minimum insulation resistance values are within tolerance. Minimum air clearances have been maintained. Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly connected and are functioning correctly. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 89 Commissioning 7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning All brakes and backstops are operating correctly. At the monitoring devices, the values for "Warning" and "Shutdown" are set. Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the the permissible speeds specified on the rating plate cannot be exceeded. Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly connected and are fully functional. Converter operation If the design of the motor requires connection to a particular converter type, the rating plate will contain corresponding additional information. The converter is correctly parameterized. The parameterization data is specified on the rating plate of the machine. Information about the parameters is available in the operating instructions for the converter. Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly connected and are functioning correctly. Roller bearing If the motor has been stored for more than two years in a dry, dust-free and vibration-free room, prepare for commissioning as follows: - Replace the rolling-contact bearings on motors with lifetime lubrication. - Replace the grease in motors with re-greasing system. - If stored under less favorable conditions, the bearings or the grease must be replaced after a storage period of approx. 18 months. Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces Type Minimum radial force 1PH818. 4 kN 1PH822. 5 kN 1PH828. 9 kN External fan All external fans fitted are ready for operation and have been connected so that they rotate in the direction specified. The flow of cooling air is not impeded. Cooling water supply The cooling water supply is connected and ready for operation. The cooling water supply is switched on. The data can be found on the rating plate. Cooling water is available in the configured quality and quantity. 90 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Commissioning 7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor 7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor If you want to start the machine for a trial run, ensure that it is connected to the cooling water supply. WARNING Risk of burning from hot steam If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot machine, hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water system can burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Do not connect the cooling water supply until the machine has cooled down. 7.4 Switching on See the operating instructions of the frequency converter for switching on. Before you switch on the motor, ensure that the parameters of the frequency converter have been assigned correctly. Use appropriate commissioning tools, such as "Drive ES" or "STARTER". NOTICE Operation noise or abnormal noises The motor can be damaged by improper handling during transport, storage or set up. If a damaged motor is operated damage to the winding, bearings or, complete destruction of the motor can be the result. If the motor is not running smoothly or is emitting abnormal noises, de-energize it, and determine the cause of the fault as the motor runs down. Maximum speed The maximum rotational speed nmax is the highest permissible operating speed. The maximum rotational speed is specified on the rating plate. See also Description (Page 21) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 91 Commissioning 7.5 Test run 7.5 Test run After installation or inspection, carry out a test run: 1. Switch on the cooling systems. 2. Start up the machine without a load. To do this, close the circuit breaker and do not switch off prematurely. Check whether it is running smoothly. Switching the machine off again while it is starting up and still running at slow speed should be kept to a bare minimum, for example for checking the direction of rotation or for checking in general. Allow the machine to run down before switching it on again. 3. If it runs perfectly, connect a load. 4. During the test run, check and document the following: - Check whether it is running smoothly. - Document the voltage, current and power values. As far as possible, document the corresponding values of the driven machine. - If this is possible using the available measuring equipment, check the bearing and stator winding temperatures until they have reached steady-state values. - Check the machine for noise or vibrations on the bearings or bearing shields as it runs. 5. In case of uneven running or abnormal noise, switch off the machine. As the machine runs down, identify the cause. - If the mechanical operation improves immediately after the machine is switched off, then the cause is magnetic or electrical. - If the mechanical running does not improve immediately after switching the machine off, then the cause is mechanical. - Imbalance of the electrical machine or the driven machine - The machine set has not been adequately aligned - The machine is being operated at the system resonance point. System = motor, base frame, foundation, ... NOTICE Serious damage to the machine If the vibration values in operation are not maintained in accordance with DIN ISO 10816-3, then the machine can be mechanically destroyed. During operation, observe the vibration values in accordance with DIN ISO 108163. 92 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Commissioning 7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) 7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) Prior to commissioning If the machine is equipped with bearing thermometers, set the temperature value for disconnection on the monitoring equipment before the first machine run. Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning Set value Temperature Alarm 115 C Shutting down 120 C Normal operation Determine the maximum operating temperature of the bearings Toperation taking into account the temperature, bearing load and influences of the plant on the motor in C. Set the values for shutdown and warning corresponding to the operating temperature Top. Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures Set value Temperature Alarm Toperation + 5 K 115 C Shutting down Toperation + 10 K 120 C SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 93 Commissioning 7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) 94 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 8 Operation 8.1 Safety instructions for operation Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions. Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations. When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. See also Safety information (Page 15) Risk of injury due to rotating parts Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational. First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the "Five safety rules": Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill. Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts) Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational. First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the "Five safety rules": When the machine is in operation, the terminal boxes must remain closed at all times. Terminal boxes may be opened only when the machine is stopped and in a no-voltage condition. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 95 Operation 8.1 Safety instructions for operation Risk of burn injuries as a result of hot surfaces Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into contact with these parts. Never touch machine parts during operation. Allow the machine to cool down before starting work. Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective equipment. Faults in operation Any changes with respect to the normal condition can indicate that the machine is not functioning correctly. Higher power consumption, temperatures or vibration levels. Unusual noise or smells. Monitoring devices respond. These changes can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage. Immediately inform the service personnel. If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the machine, carefully observing the systemspecific safety conditions. Damage caused by condensation Humidity in the air can condense for intermittent duty or load fluctuations. Condensate can collect. Moisture can have a negative impact on the winding insulation or result in damage, such as corrosion. Ensure that any condensation can freely flow away. NOTICE Non-periodic duty In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1. For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can result in damage to the machine. In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in DIN EN 600341. Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated. 96 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Operation 8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water NOTICE EC fan control via an input signal The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of the setpoint signal it receives. Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors. Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit. 8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water The motor must always be connected to the cooling water supply during operation. NOTICE Cooling water supply If the cooling water supply fails or if the motor is operated for a short time without water cooling, the motor will overheat. This can result in material damage or even a write-off. Never operate the motor without the cooling water supply switched on. Monitor the permissible water inlet temperatures. WARNING Risk of burning from hot steam If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot motor, hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water system can burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Do not connect the cooling water supply until the motor has cooled down. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 97 Operation 8.3 Switching on the machine 8.3 Switching on the machine After starting the motor, observe it for a while to see if it is running smoothly and check the monitoring devices. Monitor operation and the monitoring devices regularly and record the values you read off. NOTICE Speed monitoring The motor is designed for a certain speed range. If a motor is operated at impermissible speeds damage to the winding, bearings, or complete destruction of the motor can be the result. Ensure that the speeds specified on the rating plate are not exceeded by appropriately configuring controller and speed monitoring components. See also Description (Page 21) NOTICE Excessive machine temperature If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the temperatures inside the machine. This can result in material damage. Make sure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before the machine is switched on. Only operate anti-condensation heating when the machine is switched off. 8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors Switch off the cooling water supply for longer non-operational periods. When switching-off, also observe the converter operating instructions. If anti-condensation heating is available, switch it on. 8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors Switch off the external fan during longer standstill periods. Leave the fan on for approximately 30 minutes after switching off the motor to avoid overheating of the motor. Follow the operating instructions of the converter. 98 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Operation 8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off 8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off Check the machine before recommissioning the driven machine after an Emergency Off. Eliminate all the causes that have led to the emergency off 8.7 Stoppages The stoppage is a shutdown for a period of time, during which the machine is stopped but remains at the location of use. Under normal ambient conditions, e. g. the stopped machine is not exposed to any vibration, no increased level of corrosion, etc. in general, the following measures are necessary during stoppages. Measures for machines ready to operate during longer non-operational periods For longer periods when the machine is not being used, either energize it at regular intervals (roughly once a month), or at least spin the rotor. Please refer to the section"Switching on" (Page 91) before switching on to recommission the motor. NOTICE Damage due to improper storage The machine can be damaged if it is not stored properly. If the motor is out of service for extended periods of time, implement suitable anti-corrosion, preservation, and drying measures. When recommissioning the motor after a long period out of service, carry out the measures recommended in the chapter entitled "Commissioning (Page 87)". 8.7.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages Extended stoppages at the identical or almost identical resting position of the roller bearings can lead to damage such as brinelling or corrosion, for example. During stoppages, regularly start the machine up for a brief period once a month. As a minimum, rotate the rotor several times. If you have uncoupled the machine from the driven machine and secured the rotor with a rotor shipping brace, then remove this before turning the rotor over or starting the machine up. Make sure that the resting position of the roller bearings after the rotor has been turned over is different from what it previously had been. Use the fitted key or the coupling halves as reference markers. During re-commissioning, refer to the information in the "Commissioning" section. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 99 Operation 8.8 Decommissioning the machine See also Commissioning (Page 87) 8.8 Decommissioning the machine NOTICE Damage as a result of an extended period out of service If the machine is going to be out of service for longer than six months, then take the necessary measures for preservation and storing. Otherwise damage to the machine will result. Record the decommissioning steps. This log will be useful upon recommissioning. 8.9 Re-commissioning the machine When you re-commission the machine, proceed as follows: Study the record made when the machine was decommissioned, and reverse the measures that were taken for conservation and storage. Perform the measures listed in the "Commissioning" section. See also Commissioning (Page 87) Insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 50) 8.10 Faults 8.10.1 Inspections in the event of faults Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically. Immediately perform an inspection after such faults. Correct the cause of the fault as described in the respective remedial measures section. Repair any damage to the machine. 100 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Operation 8.10 Faults 8.10.2 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors Note When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the frequency converter if electrical faults occur. Table 8-1 Electrical faults Motor fails to start Motor accelerates sluggishly Humming noise when starting Humming noise in operation High temperature rise during no-load operation High temperature rise under load High temperature rise of individual winding sections X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8.10.3 Possible causes of faults Remedial measures Overload Reduce the load. Interruption of a phase in the supply cable Check frequency converters and supply cables. Interruption of a phase in the supply after switching on Check frequency converters and supply cables. Winding short circuit or phase short circuit in stator winding Determine the winding and insulation resistances. Con tact the Service Center. Converter output voltage too high, frequency too low Check the settings at the frequency converter and per form the automatic motor identification. X External fan is not running Check the external fan and its connections. X Wrong direction of rotation of the external fan Check the electrical connections to the external fan. X Reduced air intake Check the air ducts; clean the machine. Electrical faults at water-cooled motors Note When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the frequency converter if electrical faults occur. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 101 Operation 8.10 Faults Table 8-2 Electrical faults Motor fails to start Motor accelerates sluggishly Humming noise when starting Humming noise in operation High temperature rise during no-load operation High temperature rise under load High temperature rise of individual winding sections X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Possible causes of faults Remedial measures Overload Reduce the load. Interruption of a phase in the feeder cable Check the frequency converters and feeder cables. Interruption of a phase in the feeder cable after switching on Check the frequency converters and feeder cables. Winding short circuit or interphase short circuit in stator winding Determine the winding and insulation resistances. Contact the Service Center. Converter output voltage too high, frequency too low Check the settings at the frequency converter and perform the automatic motor identification. Cooling water not connected Check the cooling water connection. Switch on the cooling water supply. Cooling water supply switched off X 8.10.4 X Water connection / pipes defective Find the leak and seal it. Contact the Service Center. Cooling water flow rate too low Increase the cooling water flow rate. Intake temperature too high Set the correct intake temperature. Mechanical faults The following table shows the possible causes of and remedial measures for mechanical faults. Table 8-3 Mechanical faults Grinding noise Overheating Radial vibrations Axial vibrations X X X X X X 102 Possible causes of faults Remedial measures Rotating parts are grinding Establish the cause and realign the parts. Rotor not balanced Decouple the rotor and then rebalance it. Rotor out of true, shaft bent Contact the Service Center. Poor alignment Align the machine set and check the coupling. 1) Coupled machine not balanced Rebalance the coupled machine. X Shocks from coupled machine Examine the coupled machine. X X Resonance of the overall system comprising mo Reinforce the foundation after prior consultation with the tor and foundation Service Center. X X Changes in foundation Determine the cause of the changes and, if necessary, rectify. Realign the machine. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Operation 8.10 Faults Grinding noise Overheating Radial vibrations Axial vibrations X X X Possible causes of faults Remedial measures Reduced air supply, direction of rotation of fan possibly incorrect Check the air ducts; clean the machine. Uneven gearbox operation Resolve any gearbox faults. Take into account possible changes which may occur during overheating. 1) 8.10.5 Roller bearing faults Damage to roller bearings can be difficult to detect in some cases. If in doubt, replace the bearing. Use other bearing designs only after consulting the manufacturer. Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults Bearing overheats Bearing "whistles" Bearing "knocks" Possible causes of faults Remedial measures X High coupling pressure Align the machine more accurately. X Belt tension too high Reduce the drive belt tension. X Bearing contaminated Clean or replace the bearing. Check the seals. X High ambient temperature Use a suitable high-temperature grease. X X Insufficient lubrication Grease the bearings as instructed. X X Bearing canted Properly install the bearing. X X Insufficient bearing play Contact the Service Center. Excessive bearing play Contact the Service Center. Bearing corroded Replace the bearing. Check the seals. X Too much grease in bearing Remove surplus grease. X Wrong grease in the bearing Use the correct grease. X Friction marks on raceway Replace the bearing. X Brinelling or scoring Replace the bearing. Avoid any vibration at standstill X X X 8.10.6 Holding brake faults Information on holding brake faults can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions in the (Page 169) appendix. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 103 Operation 8.10 Faults 104 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9 Through careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and overhauls you can detect faults at an early stage and resolve them. This means that you can avoid consequential damage. Operating conditions and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.). Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions (Page 15) Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations at the place of installation When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. Note Please contact the service center (Page 161), if you require support with service, maintenance or repair. 9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components When carrying out any maintenance and repair work, always carefully observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for additional components. See also Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169) Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249) Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225 (Page 263) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 105 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts) Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Take the machine out of operation. Switch off the machine and ensure that it is in a no-voltage condition. Carefully comply with the "5 safety rules". Only open the terminal box when the motor is stationary and in a no voltage condition. Risk of injury due to rotating parts Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Before carrying out any repair work on the machine, take it out of operation, and carefully lock it out so that it cannot be switched on again. Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill. Risk of burn injuries due to hot surfaces In operation, the temperature of individual machine parts can increase - and only decrease slowly after switching off. You can burn yourself if you touch hot surfaces. Allow the machine to cool before starting any maintenance and service work on the machine. Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective equipment. Damage if the machine is not maintained The machine can be damaged if it is not appropriately maintained. This can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage. Maintain the machine at the specified maintenance intervals. 106 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance Damage from foreign bodies in the machine Foreign bodies such as dirt, tools or loose components can be left by accident inside the machine after maintenance is performed. These can cause short circuits, reduce the performance of the cooling system or increase noise in operation. They can also damage the motor. Ensure that no foreign bodies are left in or on the motor. Securely attach all loose parts once you have completed the work. Carefully remove any dirt. 9.2.2 Inspections in the event of faults Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically. Immediately perform an inspection after such faults. 9.2.3 Initial inspection Perform the following checks after approximately 500 operating hours or at the latest after six months: Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair Check When the motor is running The electrical parameters are maintained. X The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not deteriorated. X The motor foundation has no cracks and indentations. (*) X At stand still X (*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill. Additional checks may also be required according to the system-specific conditions. NOTICE If you detect any deviations during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They may otherwise damage the motor. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 107 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2.4 Main inspection Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection Checking When the motor is running The stated electrical characteristics are being observed X The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not deteriorated X The foundation has no cracks or indentations. (*) X At stand still X The motor is aligned within the permissible tolerance range. All the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections have been securely tightened X The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high. X Any bearing insulation has been fitted as shown on plates and labeling. X Cables and insulating parts and components are in good condition and there is no evidence of discoloring X Condensation can freely flow away. X (*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill. NOTICE Deviations from the normal state If you detect any defects or malfunctions during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They may otherwise cause damage to the machine. See also Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 51) 9.2.5 Regreasing intervals NOTICE Damage to roller bearings The regreasing intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the machine. Failure to regrease the rolling-contact bearings at the specified intervals can result in them sustaining damage. Comply with the regreasing intervals for roller bearings. The regreasing intervals are specified on the lubricant plate. 108 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2.6 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings The replacement of the permanently lubricated roller bearing is determined by the number of operating hours and is required around every three years. 9.2.7 Maintenance When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15) and the specifications contained in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. 9.2.7.1 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the polarization index at the following times: Before starting up a machine for the first time After an extended period in storage or downtime Within the scope of maintenance work The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation: Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated? Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture? As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding: Can the machine be put into operation? Must the windings be cleaned or dried? Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here: "Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51) 9.2.7.2 Maintenance intervals Perform the following maintenance measures after the operating time or the intervals specified in the following table elapse. Table 9-3 Maintenance measures Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals Initial inspection After 500 operating hours, at the latest after six months Regreasing See the lubricant plate Permanent lubrication (with coupling output) Replace bearings after approximately 20,000 operating hours, at the latest after three years SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 109 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2.7.3 Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals Cleaning Depending on the degree of pollution Main inspection After approximately 16,000 operating hours, at the latest after two years Rolling-contact bearings The motors have rolling-contact bearing bushes for grease lubrication. Depending on the version, the motors are permanently lubricated or are equipped with a regreasing device. Depending on the type of load, a deep-groove ball bearing or a cylindrical-roller bearing is fitted as a floating bearing on the drive end. The DE bearing contains built-in compression springs that help to rebalance the axial play of the external bearing rings. See also Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning (Page 89) 9.2.7.4 Lubrication The specified grease data apply for the data specified on the rating plate data and for highquality grease in accordance with the specifications in these operating instructions. These greases significantly exceed the requirements according to DIN 51825 and ISO 67439, therefore permitting the specified relubrication intervals. Initial lubrication The following greases are used for initial lubrication of the bearings in the factory. Standard version: ESSO / Unirex N3 "Performance" version: Lubcon / Sintono GPE702 Grease selection criteria The following greases are permissible for standard applications without any special requirements: High quality ISOLX BDEA3 greases according to ISO 6743-9 K3N20 greases according to DIN 51825 with lithium soap as thickener and an upper service temperature of at least +140 C / +284 F. When selecting the lubricating grease, ensure that the technical data of the grease is suitable for the application. 110 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance The lubricating grease must satisfy the criteria listed in the table below and must match the operating conditions. If different special lubricating greases are stated on the lubricant plate, then different criteria apply. Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases Criteria Standard Property, characteristic value Unit Type of base oil - Mineral oil - Thickener - Lithium - Consistency according to NLGI class DIN 51818 3 for vertical and horizontal types of construction 2 alternatively for horizontal type of construction with reduced lubrication interval Worked penetration DIN ISO 2137 220-295 0.1 mm Operating temperature range - At least -20 C ... +140 C C Dropping point DIN ISO 2176 At least +200 C C Basic oil viscosity DIN 51562-1 Approx. 100 mm/s at 40 C mm/s Additive - Antioxidation (AO), Anti-Wear (AW) Approx. 10 mm/s at 100 C - No solid lubricants Alternatively: Extreme-Pressure (EP) only after consultation with grease and bearing manufacturers FE9 test: A/1500/6000 DIN 51821-1/-2 F10 50 h at +140 C h F50 100 h at +140 C Behavior with respect to water DIN 51807 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +90 C - Corrosive effect on copper DIN 51811 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +140 C Corr. Resistance to corrosion (EMCOR) DIN 51802 / 0 - 0 (0 - 1, permissible for special greases) Corr. ISO 11007 Solid matter content, particle sizes > 25 m DIN 51813 < 10 mg/kg mg/kg Suitability of bearings - Suitable for the built-in motor bearings, seals and these speeds - Speed characteristic value nxdm mm/min NOTICE Other ambient temperatures and operating conditions For other ambient temperatures and operating conditions, an alternative grease to the one stated on the lubricant plate may only be used after prior consultation with the manufacturer. Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 111 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance NOTICE Use of other greases If other greases are used, compatibility with the overall system cannot be guaranteed. Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged. If you use greases that satisfy only the minimum requirements of DIN 51825 or ISO 6743-9, then reduce the lubrication intervals by half or appropriately adapt them. If in doubt, consult the manufacturer. Recommended greases for roller bearings For standard applications, the following high-quality greases are recommended for roller bearings for vertical and horizontal motor types of construction due to their technical attributes: Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction Manufacturer Grease type ExxonMobil Unirex N3 Esso Fuchs Renolit H443 HD88 Lubcon Turmoplex 3 FAG Arcanol Multi 3 For motors with a horizontal type of construction, you can alternatively use greases with NLGI Class 2. However, the lubrication interval is reduced by 20 %. Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction Manufacturer Grease type ExxonMobil Unirex N2 Esso Castrol Longtime PD2 Lubcon Turmogrease L 802 EP plus Shell Retinax LX2 FAG Arcanol Multi 2 For the "Performance" version, only use these special greases. The Performance version is not available for explosion-protected motors. Table 9-7 112 Grease for the "Performance" version Manufacturer Grease type Lubcon Sintono GPE702 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance NOTICE Damage caused by mixing lubrication types Mixing different greases adversely affects the lubricating properties. Only the manufacturer provides a guarantee as to whether certain greases can be mixed. Never mix different greases. Regreasing Regreasing data are stamped on the lubricant plate of the machine: Relubrication intervals in operating hours Regreasing amount in grams Grease type Regrease the bearing at the latest every 12 months irrespective of the actual number of operating hours. NOTICE Relubrication intervals The relubrication intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the machine. The roller bearings may be damaged if the relubrication intervals are not complied with. Pay attention to the instructions on the lubricant plate. Grease replacement intervals The grease replacement intervals in these operating instructions or the relubrication intervals indicated on the plate apply for the following conditions: Normal load Operation at speeds in accordance with the rating plate Low-vibration operation Neutral ambient air High-quality roller bearing greases In the case of unfavorable conditions, reduce the relubrication intervals after prior consultation with the manufacturer. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 113 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance Regreasing While regreasing, the shaft must rotate so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout the bearing. For motors that are be operated with a converter, regreasing should be carried out at low-to-medium speeds (nmin = 250 rpm, nmax = 3600 rpm) to ensure an even distribution of grease. This ensures adequate even lubrication. WARNING Rotating parts When regreasing, pay attention to all rotating components. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. 1. Clean the grease nipple before regreasing. Gradually press in an appropriate type and amount of grease, as stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in these operating instructions. The roller bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has been displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value. The used grease collects outside each bearing in a spent grease chamber. 114 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance Lubricating using the regreasing system A flat grease nipple in accordance with DIN 3404, size M10x1, is provided at both the DE and the NDE for regreasing. 1. Clean the grease nipples at the DE and NDE. 2. Press in the type and quantity of grease specified (see lubrication instruction plate). The shaft rotates so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout the bearing. The bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has been displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value. Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples and , schematic representation for types 1PH818. and 1PH822. Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple and (schematic representation for type 1PH828.) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 115 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance 9.2.7.5 Cleaning the spent grease chamber The rolling-contact bearing's spent grease chamber only has room for a limited amount of spent grease. When the spent grease chamber is full, the spent grease must be removed, otherwise it will penetrate into the interior of the machine. The information on the amount of grease to be used when regreasing can be found on the lubricant plate. When changing the bearings remove the spent grease that has collected in the spent grease chamber and in the outer bearing cover. To remove the spent grease, proceed as follows: 1. Remove the transmission element. 2. Remove the spent grease: - At the DE, unscrew the outer bearing cover and empty the spent grease from the outer bearing cover. - At the NDE, remove the cover of the speed sensor and the cover of the spent grease chamber. Empty the spent grease chamber. Note For types 1PH818. and 1PH822., you must remove the fan before removing the speed encoder cover. At the NDE, remove the fan and then the speed encoder cover. 9.2.7.6 Maintaining the cooling water system The cooling water pipe system, made of high-grade steel, is maintenance-free if the required coooling water quality (Page 29) is maintained. 9.2.7.7 Servicing the external fan Check the external fan every 12 months for mechanical vibration as specified in DIN ISO 10816. The maximum permissible vibrational severity is 2.8 mm/s measured at the fan housing. Regularly clean and inspect the fan. Impeller and frame are subject to natural wear depending on the area of application and displacement medium. WARNING Impeller can crack Due to deposits and the resulting imbalance there is a hazard of fatigue fracture of the impeller. The impeller can crack in operation. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result. Regularly clean and inspect the fan. 116 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance WARNING Voltages at the internal motor connections The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result. For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or changes to the fan. The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent function. After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts up automatically again when the voltage is restored. Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it. Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the external fan is not in operation. Clean the external fan WARNING Danger of shearing Death, severe injury and material damage can occur if you come into contact with the rotating fan impeller. The fan impeller must be stationary when carrying out any work on the external cooling system. Interrupt/disconnect the external cooling unit circuit. Lock out the circuit so that it cannot be switched on again. NOTICE Applying force If excessive forces are present, this can damage the fan impeller. Use a suitable cloth or brush to clean the external fan, ensuring that moisture does not enter the motor. Once the voltage has been disconnected on all poles, wait for five minutes before touching the device. Never open the external cooling unit during operation. Never loosen any fixing screws for the external cooling unit during operation. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 117 Maintenance 9.2 Inspection and maintenance Changing the filter mat of the external fan (option) Check the state of the filter mat regularly depending on the prevailing conditions. Change it if it is dirty. CAUTION Changing the filter only when the fan is stationary When the mesh is removed, the degree of protection is no longer guaranteed. There is a risk of injury. Only change the filter when the fan is stationary. 1. Unscrew the fan guard and remove the old filter mat. 2. Insert the new filter mats and screw the fan guard back into position. You can order the filter mat as a spare part. Spare parts, external fan (Page 145) Spare parts kits (Page 133) Ordering spare parts via the Internet (Page 134) 9.2.7.8 Maintaining terminal boxes Requirement The machine is de-energized. Checking the terminal box Terminal boxes must be regularly checked for tightness, undamaged insulation, and tight terminal connections. If dust or humidity have infiltrated the terminal box, this should be cleaned and dried (particularly the insulators). Check all the seals and sealing surfaces and address the cause of the leakiness. Check the insulators, connectors and cable connections in the terminal box. Replace the damaged components if necessary. WARNING Short-circuit hazard Damaged components can cause short circuits, possibly resulting in death, serious injuries and property damage. Replace damaged components. 118 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair 9.3 Repair Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine: Comply with the general safety instructions. Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations. When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid down in EN 501101 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment. See also Safety information (Page 15) Note If the motor has to be transported, please observe the information and instructions in the "Transport" (Page 36) section. 9.3.1 Prepare servicing work The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and dimensions of fixing elements and components. For this reason, you should establish this information when dismantling them and make a note of it for the purpose of reassembly. Document the type, dimensions and arrangement of the parts so that you will be able to reassemble the machine to its original state. Use suitable tools to disassemble the machine. Take measures to prevent parts from dropping down before you dismantle them, e.g. by replacing fastening elements with extra-long screws, threaded bolts or similar. This ensures that the part is supported after it is pulled off. The centerings in the shaft extensions have reset threads. Use lifting gear which is suitable for the rotor weight and direction of loading. WARNING Rotor can fall down Eyebolts in accordance with DIN 580 are unsuitable for suspending the rotor. The rotor can fall off. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Use lifting gear which is suitable for the rotor weight and direction of loading. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 119 Maintenance 9.3 Repair WARNING Machine damage caused by improper repair work Improper servicing work can damage the machine. This can cause damages and/or faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury, or property damage. Properly assemble or disassemble the machine. Use only suitable tools and equipment. Immediately replace damaged components. Contact the Service Center (Page 161), if necessary. 9.3.2 Screws with preCOTE coating The motor can partly be fitted with screws with preCOTE coating. To ensure screw locking, use new screws with preCOTE coating during assembly/repair. As an alternative, use normal screws with a threadlocker such as Loctite. 9.3.3 Disassembling a water-cooled motor The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and dimensions of fixing elements, etc. NOTICE Removing centered parts Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools. Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft. Disassembly 1. Unscrew the water pipes. 2. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for possible damage prior to re-installing. 3. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the entry plate from the terminal box housing. In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent. 4. Remove the cable at the outer grounding terminal 5. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor. 120 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Links The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line supply. Component assignment When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for example: Bearing shield Bearings Corrugated springs Covers with different centering length, etc. See also Service and Support (Page 161) 9.3.4 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and dimensions of fixing elements, etc. NOTICE Removing centered parts Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools. Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft. Disassembly 1. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for possible damage prior to re-installing. 2. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the entry plate from the terminal box housing. In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent. 3. Remove the connecting cables in the terminal box of the fan motor, and if necessary the cable on the ground terminal and the cables laid out on the motor. 4. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 121 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Links The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line supply. Component assignment When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for example: Bearing shield Bearings Compression springs Spacer washers, Covers with different centering length, etc. See also Service and Support (Page 161) If roller-contact bearings with an insulated design are installed, use roller bearings of the same type as spare parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents. 9.3.5 Removing and installing the protecting ring The protecting ring acts as an outer bearing seal. It sits on the shaft outside the bearing end shield. Disassembly Once the coupling is detached, you can remove the protective ring from the shaft. After it has been removed, the protective ring will be deformed and must be replaced. 122 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Assembly Push the protecting ring over the end of the shaft. For 1PH818. or 1PH822. motors, ensure that the outer collar is placed with a space of 1 mm from the bearing end shield (detail Z). = PP = Figure 9-3 9.3.6 Fitting the protecting ring Removing and mounting the bearing shields 1. Unscrew the belt pulleys. The belt pulleys may be jammed or distorted, in which case you should lever them off carefully. 2. Remove the bearing shield. - When removing the bearing shields, take care that the windings are not damaged. - For water-cooled motors, also ensure that the cooling water pipes are not damaged. For assembly, proceed in reverse order. WARNING Lifting using the cooling water pipes The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor. The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor. 9.3.7 Installing and sealing the motor Strictly ensure the greatest possible care and cleanliness when repairing the machine. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 123 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Mount the machine on an alignment plate. This ensures that the contact surfaces of the motor feet are all on the same level. NOTICE Do not damage windings Windings protrude from the stator housing and can be damaged when attaching the end shield. This can damage the motor. When mounting the end shield, ensure that the windings that project from the stator housing are not damaged. Sealing the machine (types 1PH818. and 1PH8225.) Clean bare joints between parts before re-assembling (e.g. between enclosures, end shields and the active parts of bearings). Brush the bare joints with the non-hardening sealing agent "Hylomar M". Note that these joints between parts (e.g. the sealing gap on the active part of the bearing) must also be resealed with a suitable, silicone-free sealant during assembly. Check the sealing elements fitted (e.g. at the terminal boxes) and replace them if they do not provide an adequate seal. Follow the manufacturer's application and safety instructions when using the sealant. Replace parts that are subject to wear such as the adjusting springs. Installing the bearing inserts 1. First position the parts that must be arranged on the shaft within the bearing. 2. To fit the bearings on the shaft, heat them up to about 80 C in oil or air. 3. Then push the bearings onto the shaft up to its shoulder. Avoid any heavy blows that might damage the bearings. 4. Fill the bearing to the top with the specified lubricating grease (Page 110). 124 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair 9.3.8 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.) 1. When assembling, seal the joints between parts, such as the sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shield, using suitable, silicon-free sealing compound. 2. Use joint sealant due to the higher requirements for degree of protection IP55. Seal the joint using a non-hardening sealant, which remains permanently plastic, before screwing on the bearing shields, for example "Hylomar M". 3. Check all the sealing elements, for example on the terminal box, for elasticity, aging or damage. Replace any sealing elements if they are no longer fully effective. End shields Sealing gap Figure 9-4 Housing Protective tube Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation) Installing the active parts of the bearings When installing/replacing the bearing, ensure that an insulated bearing is again installed at the NDE. If radial shaft seals without helical springs are installed, also install the replacement part without a spring. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 125 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Sealing the bearings The outer bearing seal comprises a rotary shaft seal. When installing the bearings, make sure that the seat of the shaft is not greased. The correct axial position of the rotary shaft seal is achieved when the outer edges of the bearing cap end face and rotary shaft seal are flush. Bearing cap end face Rotary shaft seal Seat of shaft Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal See also Installing and sealing the motor (Page 123) 9.3.9 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.) Subsequently moving the external fan from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried out by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161). 9.3.10 Removing and mounting the external fan WARNING Live parts Contact with live parts can cause death, serious injury or material damage. 1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply, particularly before opening the terminal box. 2. Make sure that the device cannot be switched back on. 126 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Removing and mounting the external fan 1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply. 2. Unscrew the screws and remove the external fan. 3. For mounting, proceed in reverse order. Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.) Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 127 Maintenance 9.3 Repair 9.3.11 Removing and mounting the speed sensor NOTICE Electrostatic discharge Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly. To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18). Preparation For 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors, the speed encoder can only be removed and replaced if the external fan (Page 126) has been removed. Shaft Speed encoder Torque arm Encoder cover Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder 1. Unscrew the cover of the speed encoder. 2. Detach the electrical connection. - Pull the cable carefully out of its holder. - Pull out the connector. 3. Remove the screwed union connections for the speed encoder from the bearing shield. 128 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair Separating the speed encoder The following options are available for the purpose of separating the speed encoder from the shaft by means of a clamping screw: Disassembling the speed encoder - Version A 0[ 0[ 0[ 1. Remove screw M5x50 (). 2. Screw in screw M5x10 and screw M6x70 one after the other. This releases the encoder cone in the motor shaft (). 3. Remove the speed encoder. Removing the speed encoder - version B FDrr 0 1. Loosen the retaining screw (). 2. Press screw M10 onto the original screw. This will then drop out (). 3. Remove the speed encoder. Mounting the speed encoder 1. Screw the torque arm to the speed encoder, tightening the two screws by hand. 2. Use the M5x50 screw to secure the speed encoder over the internal cone, ensuring a tightening torque of 5 Nm at the shaft extension. 3. Attach the torque arm to the bearing cover with a tightening torque of 3 Nm. 4. Loosen the screws of the torque arm so as to relieve the stress and tighten them crosswise, with a tightening torque of 0.6 Nm. 5. Establish the electrical connection. 6. Screw on the cover of the speed encoder. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 129 Maintenance 9.3 Repair 9.3.12 Connecting the speed encoder NOTICE Electrostatic discharge Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly. To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18). 1. Insert the connector into the socket. 2. Press the cable into the holder provided for it. 3. Screw on the sensor cover. Take care that you do not catch the cable as you screw it in. Figure 9-9 9.3.13 Electrical connection of the speed sensor Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module) Only trained Siemens service engineers (Page 161) are authorized to replace the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (sensor module). NOTICE Electrostatic discharge Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling. To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the chapter ESD Guidelines (Page 18). 130 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Maintenance 9.3 Repair WARNING Motor-specific sensor module The Sensor Module contains motor-specific and sensor-specific data and an electronic nameplate. If you operate a different Sensor Module on the motor, this can result in serious injury or death, or cause considerable material damage. Only operate the sensor module on the original motor. Do not install the sensor module on other motors. Do not replace the sensor module with a sensor module from a different motor. 9.3.14 Touch up any damaged paintwork If the paint is damaged, it must be repaired in order to protect the unit against corrosion. Note Paint system Contact the Service Center (Page 161) before you repair any paint damage. They will provide you with more information about the correct paint system and methods of repairing paint damage. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 131 Maintenance 9.3 Repair 132 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 10 Spare parts 10.1 Ordering data When ordering spare parts, in addition to the precise designation of the spare part, specify the motor type and the serial number of the motor. Ensure that the spare part designation matches the designation in the spare part lists and add the associated part number. Example: Spare part Machine type Serial number Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (Part 3.00) 1PH81841JD202FA1 N-W91246206010001 The machine type and the serial number are indicated on the rating plate and in the technical data, and are also embossed on the drive end of the shaft. Note Bar code on rating plate You can also read the machine type and serial number from the bar code on the rating plate. Note The graphics in this chapter are schematic representations of the basic versions. They are used for spare parts definitions. The supplied version may differ in details from these representations. 10.2 Spare parts kits The spare parts are bundled with the necessary wearing parts in a logical way so as to create spare parts kits. The following spare parts kits are available for you to order: 3.00 4.00 32.00 55.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing (complete) Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (complete) Spare parts kit, external fan (only force-ventilated motors) Spare parts kit, relevant version of speed encoder Additional spare parts are available on request. See also Service and Support (Page 161) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 133 Spare parts 10.3 Holding brake Note DRIVE-CLiQ interface If you order a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, please specify when ordering from Spares on Web that the DRIVE-CLiQ interface must be described along with the motor data. 10.3 Holding brake Contact your Service Center for spare parts for the holding brake. See also Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169) Rolling bearings When ordering rolling bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the supplementary specifying code is also necessary for the bearing version. Both of these codes are stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in the motor documentation, or can also be taken from the installed bearings. Always replace the rolling bearings with the identical bearings. If insulated rolling bearings are fitted, use insulated rolling bearings of the same type as spare parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents. 10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet You can use "Spares on Web" to determine the order numbers for motor spare parts quickly and easily. . See also Spares on Web (https://www.sow.siemens.com/) Guide for Spares on Web (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/news/en/25248626) 134 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.5 Anti-condensation heating 10.5 Anti-condensation heating The anti-condensation heater is mounted directly on the winding. The anti-condensation heater cannot be removed without causing damage to the winding. A new anti-condensation heater may only be installed by Siemens Service Center (Page 161) specialists. 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.1 Water-cooled motor, complete Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete) Table 10-1 Motor, complete Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing 8.00* Rotor, complete 4.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core, winding and cooling water pipe system) 55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder 10.35* Hoisting lug 5.00* Bearing shield, drive end 20.00* Terminal box 6.00* Bearing shield, non-drive end 99.00* Special built-on parts * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 135 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.2 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing Figure 10-2 Table 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Radial shaft sealing ring Inner ring 3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs * On request 136 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.20* Outer bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 137 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing Figure 10-4 Table 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.45* Corrugated spring * On request 138 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent lubrication Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 139 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication Figure 10-6 Table 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Retaining ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request 140 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Figure 10-7 Table 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Retaining ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 141 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) 4.60* Inner bearing cover Retaining ring * On request 142 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.6 Water-cooled motor 10.6.9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance" Figure 10-9 Table 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear ing 4.80* Grease nipple 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Shrink ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 143 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.1 Force-ventilated motor, complete Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete Table 10-10 Motor, complete Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core and winding) 4.00 Spare parts kit, DE bearing 10.35* Eyebolt 5.00* Bearing shield, DE 20.00* Terminal box 6.00* Bearing shield, NDE 32.00 External fan 8.00* Rotor, complete 55.10 Spare parts kit, speed encoder * On request 144 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.2 External fan Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan Part Description Part Description 32.00 Fan 34.31 External grill cover 34.21 Filter element * 34.33 Inside basket * Option for type 1PH828. 10.7.3 External fan (option L75) The external fan for option L75 can only be ordered as a part. Contact the Service Center, if necessary. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 145 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.4 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Radial shaft sealing ring Inner ring 3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs * On request 146 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.5 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.20* Outer bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 147 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.6 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 3.60* Inner bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.45* Corrugated spring * On request 148 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.7 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication Number Designation 3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing) Protecting ring (rotating) 3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 149 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Retaining ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request 150 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.9 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Retaining ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 151 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.10 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 4.80* Grease nipple Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) 4.60* Inner bearing cover Retaining ring * On request 152 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.7 Force-ventilated motor 10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance" Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing Number Designation Number Designation 4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear ing 4.80* Grease nipple 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing) Shrink ring 4.60* Inner bearing cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 153 Spare parts 10.8 Terminal box 10.8 Terminal box Figure 10-20 Terminal box Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box Number Designation Number Designation 20.20* Enclosure 20.50* Entry plate 20.30* Cover 20.60* Adapter plate (optional) * On request 154 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Spare parts 10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) 10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Figure 10-21 Speed encoder Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) Part Description 55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder Speed encoder Torque arm 55.71 Cable with plug connector 6.80* Cover * On request SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 155 Spare parts 10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.) 10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.) Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.) Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.) Part Description Part Description 6.80 Cover 55.63 Torque arm 55.12 Speed encoder 55.71 Cable with plug connector 156 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 11 Disposal Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product development stage. Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its components are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal regulations. Country-specific legislation The machine uses materials that can be recovered or recycled. Correctly separating materials helps to simply recycle important materials. When disposing of the machine or of waste that is created during the individual phases of its life cycle, please observe the statutory requirements applicable in the country of use. Please contact your local authorities for more information about disposal. 11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances In compliance with RoHS ("Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances" ) we replace substances that are damaging to the environment by those that are not based on state-of-theart technology. In doing so, safety in operation and handling will take priority at all times. 11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation This product contains one or several subproducts in which the following substance - belonging to the "list of candidates" - exists in a concentration exceeding 0.1 percent by weight. CAS No. 7439-92-1, lead Based on the currently available information, we assume that this substance does not represent any risk when correctly used, including its disposal. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 157 Disposal 11.3 Preparing for disassembly 11.3 Preparing for disassembly Disassembly of the machine must be carried out and/or supervised by qualified personnel with appropriate expert knowledge. 1. Contact a certified waste disposal organization in your vicinity. Clarify what is expected in terms of the quality of dismantling the machine and provision of the components. 2. Follow the five safety rules (Page 15). 3. Disconnect all electrical connections and remove all cables. 4. Remove all liquids such as oil and cooling liquids. Collect the liquids separately and dispose of them in a professional manner. 5. Detach the machine fixings. 6. Transport the machine to a suitable location for disassembly. See also Maintenance (Page 105) 11.4 Dismantling the machine Dismantle the machine using the general procedures commonly used in mechanical engineering. WARNING Machine parts can fall The machine is made up of heavy parts. These parts are liable to fall during dismantling. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage. Before you release any machine parts, secure them so that they cannot fall. 11.5 Disposal of components Components The machines consist mainly of steel and various proportions of copper and aluminum. Metals are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable. Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are: Iron and steel Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling. Insulating materials 158 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Disposal 11.5 Disposal of components Cables and wires Electronic waste Process materials and chemicals Sort the process materials and chemicals for recycling according to whether they are for example: Oil Grease Cleaning substances and solvents Paint residues Anti-corrosion agent Coolant additives such as inhibitors, antifreeze or biocides Dispose of the separated components according to local regulations or via a specialist disposal company. The same applies for cloths and cleaning substances which have been used while working on the machine. Packaging material If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company. Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local regulations. The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled thermally. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration. SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 159 Disposal 11.5 Disposal of components 160 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Service and Support A * Based on the serial number stamped on the rating plate, you can identify where the machine was manufactured and where you can have your questions answered: No:N... = Nuremberg No.UC... = Frenstat See also Description (Page 21) More information Information on the following topics is available at: Ordering documentation / overview of documentation Additional links to download documents Using documentation online (find and search in manuals / information) More information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108998034) If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions, corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address E-mail (mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com). My support The following link provides information on how to create your own individual documentation based on Siemens content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation: My support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/de/en/documentation) Note If you want to use this function, you must first register. Later, you can log on with your login data. Training The following link provides information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for products, systems and automation engineering solutions: SITRAIN (http://siemens.com/sitrain) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 161 Service and Support Technical Support Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet under Contact: Technical Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com) Websites of third parties This publication contains hyperlinks to websites of third parties. Siemens does not take any responsibility for the contents of these websites or adopt any of these websites or their contents as their own, because Siemens does not control the information on these websites and is also not responsible for the contents and information provided there. Use of these websites is at the risk of the person doing so. Internet address for products Products (http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol) Siemens Support for on the move With the "Siemens Industry Online Support" App, you can access more than 300,000 documents for Siemens Industry products - any time and any where. The App supports you in the following areas: Resolving problems when executing a project Troubleshooting when faults develop Expanding a system or planning a new system Further, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our experts have drawn-up: FAQs Application examples Manuals Certificates Product announcements and many more The app is available for Apple iOS, Android and Windows Phone. 162 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 B Technical specifications B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections Bolt locking devices Refit nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient, and/or force-distributing elements with identical, fully-functional elements when re-assembling. Always renew keyed elements. When screwing together threads secured with a liquid adhesive, use a suitable medium such as Loctite 243. Always use suitable securing devices or removable adhesives (e.g., Loctite 243) when installing fixing bolts with a clamping length of less than 25 mm. The clamping length is taken as the distance between the head of the bolt and the point at which the bolt is screwed in. Tightening torques The bolted connections with metal contact surfaces, such as end shields, bearing cartridge parts, terminal box parts bolted onto the stator frame, should be tightened to the following torques, depending on the thread size: Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of 10%. Case M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56 A 1.2 2.5 4 8 13 20 40 52 80 150 - - - - Nm B 1.3 2.6 4.5 11 22 38 92 180 310 620 1080 1700 2600 4200 Nm C 3 5 8 20 40 70 170 340 600 1200 2000 3100 4700 7500 Nm SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 163 Technical specifications B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections Applications The above-mentioned tightening torques apply for the following applications: Case A Applies to electrical connections in which the permissible torque is normally limited by the bolt materials and/or the current carrying capacity of the insulators, with the exception of the busbar connections in case B. Case B Applies to bolts screwed into components made from materials with lower property class (e. g. aluminum) and to bolts with property class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1. Case C Applies to bolts with property class 8.8, A4-70 or A4-80 according to ISO 898-1, however only to bolts screwed into components made from materials with higher property class, e.g. cast iron, steel or cast steel. Note Non-standard tightening torques Different tightening torques for electrical connections and bolted connections for parts with flat seals or insulating parts are specified in the relevant sections and drawings. 164 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Quality documents C You can find the quality documents here: https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/ps/13358/cert (https:// support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13358/cert) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 165 Quality documents 166 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 D Additional documents D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake Holding brake Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height. NOTICE Technical data for the special version of the holding brake The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply. Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake Technical data NFF-A 63 NFF-A 100 1PH818. (SH180) 1PH822. (SH225) Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600 Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100 Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88 Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm ] 0.022 0.051 Total moment of inertia (emer gency stop) Jtotal [kgm2] 1.3 3.9 Rated voltage 2 U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC) Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210 Coil current I [A] 2.21 2.70 Number of emergency stops Z - 2000 1200 Opening time [ms] 300 300 Closing time [ms] 80 100 Note More information Commissioning (Page 87) See also Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169) SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 167 Additional documents D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake 168 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Additional documents D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 169 Additional documents D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake 170 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 193 Additional documents D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180 194 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 10 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 11 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be observed when working on the device. Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area increases the risk of accidents. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. 195 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. Translation of the original operating instructions The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport NOTE Transporting the device Transport the device in its original packaging only. Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a lashing strip. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 196 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 197 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2 3 Terminal strip PE L N NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm 198 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 1~ 230 200 .. 277 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 2900 245 1.1 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change Control input 0-10 V / PWM Control range for modulation level 50-100% Alarm relay activates on warning "Module temperature 101C" 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 46.8 A Static 64 Yes 43.8 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G250-RR03-H4 0.23 705 486 2905 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Conformity with standards Approval 11.8 kg 250 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 7 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Power limiter - Motor current limitation - PFC, active - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730 199 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Strength class of screws Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. 8.8 The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 200 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. ; Note the following when routing the cables: For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least four times the outside diameter of the cable. For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the outside diameter of the cable. Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. 4.2.2 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 4 W. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 201 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. PWM control PWM control 01 100 10 No Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) Translation of the original operating instructions Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 202 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 3 5 6 N L NC Color green/ yellow blue black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 k; adjustable curve RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for external devices (e.g. pot) 203 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). ; Make sure a restart is impossible The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. ; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. Translation of the original operating instructions NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage 4.8 Switching off the device Switching off the device during operation: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Line voltage faulty Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply, apply control signal. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ;204 When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Faulty connection Motor/electronics overtemperature Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Thermal overload Allow motor to cool protector activated off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Reset by reducing control input to 0. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation point. Let the device cool down. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Translation of the original operating instructions Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean impeller or replace device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Abnormal bearing noise acoustic Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device At least every 6 months Fasten 6.4 Disposal Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 205 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. 206 Item no. 55700-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-12 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 207 Additional documents D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225 208 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 11 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be observed when working on the device. Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area increases the risk of accidents. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. 209 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. Translation of the original operating instructions The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport WARNING Transporting the fan Injuries from tipping or slipping The fan is always to be transported with care and in its original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling. Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible wind forces. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. 210 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 211 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2 3 Terminal strip PE L N NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm 212 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 1~ 230 200 .. 277 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 2550 460 2.0 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 56.2 A Static 70.4 Yes 46.8 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G280-RR03-H4 0.44 1605 512 2560 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Conformity with standards Approval 17.5 kg 280 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 6 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Power limiter - Motor current limitation - PFC, active - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730 213 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Strength class of screws Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. 8.8 The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 214 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. ; Note the following when routing the cables: For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least four times the outside diameter of the cable. For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the outside diameter of the cable. Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. 4.2.2 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 4 W. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 215 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. PWM control PWM control 01 100 10 No Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) Translation of the original operating instructions Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 216 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 3 5 6 N L NC Color green/ yellow blue black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 k; adjustable curve RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for external devices (e.g. pot) 217 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation: ; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. Fault Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Translation of the original operating instructions Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. The maximum permissible vibration severity must not exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6 months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6. Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies. 218 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Ambient temperature too high Reduce the ambient temperature. Reset by reducing control input to 0. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation point. Let the device cool down. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Motor not turning Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Mechanical blockage Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Faulty connection Thermal overload protector activated Motor/electronics overtemperature Deficient cooling Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply, apply control signal. Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Allow motor to cool off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device 219 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-H4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables Abnormal bearing noise Vibration test acoustic Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months At least every 6 months Vibration tester, Recommended start-up or every 6 months deceleration measurement Fasten Clean impeller or replace device Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device Clean impeller or replace device 6.4 Disposal For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. Translation of the original operating instructions 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 220 Item no. 55768-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 221 Additional documents D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 222 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 10 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 11 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock 223 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. Translation of the original operating instructions 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport NOTE Transporting the device Transport the device in its original packaging only. Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a lashing strip. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. 224 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 225 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2 3 Terminal strip PE L N NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery. 226 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 1~ 230 200 .. 277 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml/ce Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 3100 300 1.3 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 49.7 A Static 66 Yes 44.8 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G250-RR17-H9 0.28 805 574 3105 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Conformity with standards Approval Comment 11.8 kg 250 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 7 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Power limiter - Motor current limitation - PFC, active - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC Operational is only permitted with the optional guard grill available from ebmpapst. 227 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Strength class of screws Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. 8.8 +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 228 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. ; Note the following when routing the cables: For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least four times the outside diameter of the cable. For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the outside diameter of the cable. Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. 4.2.2 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 4 W. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 229 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. PWM control PWM control 01 100 10 No Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) Translation of the original operating instructions Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 230 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 3 5 6 N L NC Color green/ yellow blue black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 k; adjustable curve RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for external devices (e.g. pot) 231 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). ; Make sure a restart is impossible The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. ; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. Translation of the original operating instructions NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage 4.8 Switching off the device Switching off the device during operation: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Line voltage faulty Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply, apply control signal. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ;232 When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Faulty connection Motor/electronics overtemperature Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Thermal overload Allow motor to cool protector activated off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Reset by reducing control input to 0. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation point. Let the device cool down. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Translation of the original operating instructions Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean or replace impeller Visual inspection At least every 6 months Abnormal bearing noise acoustic Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device At least every 6 months Fasten 6.4 Disposal Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 233 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. 234 Item no. 55686-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 235 Additional documents D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 236 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 11 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be observed when working on the device. Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area increases the risk of accidents. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. 237 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. Translation of the original operating instructions The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport WARNING Transporting the fan Injuries from tipping or slipping The fan is always to be transported with care and in its original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling. Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible wind forces. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. 238 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 239 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2 3 Terminal strip PE L N NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery. 240 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 1~ 230 200 .. 277 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 2700 520 2.3 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 58.6 A Static 72.2 Yes 47.4 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G280-RR04-H9 0.51 1815 540 2655 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Conformity with standards Approval Comment 16.8 kg 280 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 6 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Power limiter - Motor current limitation - PFC, active - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC Operational is only permitted with the optional guard grill available from ebmpapst. 241 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Strength class of screws Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. 8.8 The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 242 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. ; Note the following when routing the cables: For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least four times the outside diameter of the cable. For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the outside diameter of the cable. Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. 4.2.2 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 4 W. 4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 243 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. PWM control PWM control 01 100 10 No Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) Translation of the original operating instructions Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 244 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 3 5 6 N L NC Color green/ yellow blue black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 k; adjustable curve RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for external devices (e.g. pot) 245 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation: ; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. Fault Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Translation of the original operating instructions Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. The maximum permissible vibration severity must not exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6 months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6. Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies. 246 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Ambient temperature too high Reduce the ambient temperature. Reset by reducing control input to 0. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation point. Let the device cool down. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Motor not turning Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Mechanical blockage Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Faulty connection Thermal overload protector activated Motor/electronics overtemperature Deficient cooling Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply, apply control signal. Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Allow motor to cool off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device 247 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-H9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables Abnormal bearing noise Vibration test acoustic Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months At least every 6 months Vibration tester, Recommended start-up or every 6 months deceleration measurement Fasten Clean impeller or replace device Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device Clean impeller or replace device 6.4 Disposal For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. Translation of the original operating instructions 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 248 Item no. 55769-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94781 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 249 Additional documents D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 250 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 10 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock 251 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. Translation of the original operating instructions 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport NOTE Transporting the device Transport the device in its original packaging only. Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a lashing strip. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. 252 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/ TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems. The device is to be used in networks with network quality characteristics as per EN 50160. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 253 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 3 Terminal strip PE L1 L2 L3 NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm 254 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 3~ 400 380 .. 480 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 2900 240 0.44 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 46.9 A Static 64.1 Yes 43.9 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G250-RR03-M4 0.23 700 500 2920 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Protection class Conformity with standards Approval 11.8 kg 250 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 7 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - External 24 V input (parameter setting) - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Motor current limitation - PFC, passive - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000 maximum - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730 255 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Strength class of screws Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. 8.8 +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 1675 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point of the customer system to the public power system is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation with the network operator, that this device is only connected to a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 256 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Device malfunctions possible Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. Maintain the greatest possible clearance. Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable routing) NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line protection only, no equipment protection). Nominal voltage 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC Fuse VDE 16 A UL 15 A Automatic circuit breaker VDE C16A Cable crosssection mm 1.5 Cable crosssection *AWG 16 * AWG = American Wire Gauge 4.2.3 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 5 W. 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.5 Leakage current For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 257 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Translation of the original operating instructions Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 PWM control PWM control 01 100 5 Yes Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) 258 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 L1 L2 L3 NC Color green/ yellow black black black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply Power supply Power supply Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 k, adjustable curve, SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for external devices (e.g. pot), SELV fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply 259 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). ; Make sure a restart is impossible The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. ; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Phase failure 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Translation of the original operating instructions Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. A phase of the supply voltage fails for at least 5 s. ; When all phases are correctly supplied again, the motor automatically restarts after 10-40 s. Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. 4.8 Switching off the device Switching off the device during operation: ; Switch off the device via the control input. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. ;260 When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, restore power supply. Attention! The error message resets automatically. Device restarts automatically without warning. Faulty connection Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Broken motor winding Replace device Thermal overload Allow motor to cool protector activated off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation (e.g. back point. Let the device pressure too high) cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten 261 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean or replace impeller Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Abnormal bearing noise acoustic Visual inspection At least every 6 months At least every 6 months Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device 6.4 Disposal Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Translation of the original operating instructions Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards 262 Item no. 55691-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 263 Additional documents D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225 264 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 11 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 12 12 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be observed when working on the device. Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area increases the risk of accidents. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. 265 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 1 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. Translation of the original operating instructions The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport WARNING Transporting the fan Injuries from tipping or slipping The fan is always to be transported with care and in its original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling. Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible wind forces. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. 266 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 2 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/ TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems. The device is to be used in networks with network quality characteristics as per EN 50160. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 267 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 3 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 3 Terminal strip PE L1 L2 L3 NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm 268 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 4 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 3~ 400 380 .. 480 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 2550 450 0.75 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 56.9 A Static 71.4 Yes 46.5 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G280-RR03-M4 0.42 1400 557 2555 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Protection class Conformity with standards Approval 18.0 kg 280 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 6 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - External 24 V input (parameter setting) - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Motor current limitation - PFC, passive - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000 maximum - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730 269 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 5 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Strength class of screws Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. 8.8 The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 1675 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point of the customer system to the public power system is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation with the network operator, that this device is only connected to a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 270 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 6 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Device malfunctions possible Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. Maintain the greatest possible clearance. Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable routing) NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line protection only, no equipment protection). Nominal voltage 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC Fuse VDE 16 A UL 15 A Automatic circuit breaker VDE C16A Cable crosssection mm 1.5 Cable crosssection *AWG 16 * AWG = American Wire Gauge 4.2.3 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 5 W. 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.5 Leakage current For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 271 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 7 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Translation of the original operating instructions Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 PWM control PWM control 01 100 5 Yes Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) 272 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 8 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 L1 L2 L3 NC Color green/ yellow black black black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply Power supply Power supply Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 k, adjustable curve, SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for external devices (e.g. pot), SELV fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply 273 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 9 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation: ; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. Fault Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Phase failure Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. A phase of the supply voltage fails for at least 5 s. ; When all phases are correctly supplied again, the motor automatically restarts after 10-40 s. Translation of the original operating instructions Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. The maximum permissible vibration severity must not exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6 months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6. Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies. 274 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 10 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation (e.g. back point. Let the device pressure too high) cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Faulty connection Broken motor winding Thermal overload protector activated Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply. Attention! The error message resets automatically. Device restarts automatically without warning. Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Replace device Allow motor to cool off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. 275 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 11 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean impeller or replace device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Abnormal bearing noise Vibration test acoustic Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device At least every 6 months Vibration tester, Recommended start-up or every 6 months deceleration measurement Clean impeller or replace device 6.4 Disposal Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Translation of the original operating instructions Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables Fasten Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards 276 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 12 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR03-M4 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Translation of the original operating instructions Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. 277 Item no. 55771-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94605 * Approved 2017-09-29 * Page 13 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com 278 D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 279 Additional documents D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 280 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 10 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 11 11 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock 281 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. Translation of the original operating instructions 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport NOTE Transporting the device Transport the device in its original packaging only. Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a lashing strip. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. 282 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/ TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems. The device is to be used in networks with network quality characteristics as per EN 50160. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 283 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 3 Terminal strip PE L1 L2 L3 NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery. 284 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 3~ 400 380 .. 480 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 3100 300 0.5 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 48.9 A Static 65 Yes 44.9 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G250-RR17-M9 0.29 905 511 3105 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Protection class Conformity with standards Approval Comment 11.8 kg 250 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 7 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - External 24 V input (parameter setting) - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Motor current limitation - PFC, passive - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000 maximum - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC Operational is only permitted with the optional guard grill available from ebmpapst. 285 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Strength class of screws Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. 8.8 +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. Translation of the original operating instructions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC immunity to interference EMC circuit feedback EMC interference emission According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial environment) According to EN 61000-3-2/3 According to EN 61000-6-3 (household environment) If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 1675 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point of the customer system to the public power system is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation with the network operator, that this device is only connected to a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 286 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Device malfunctions possible Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. Maintain the greatest possible clearance. Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable routing) NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line protection only, no equipment protection). Nominal voltage 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC Fuse VDE 16 A UL 15 A Automatic circuit breaker VDE C16A Cable crosssection mm 1.5 Cable crosssection *AWG 16 * AWG = American Wire Gauge 4.2.3 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 5 W. 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.5 Leakage current For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 287 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Translation of the original operating instructions Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 PWM control PWM control 01 100 5 Yes Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) 288 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 L1 L2 L3 NC Color green/ yellow black black black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply Power supply Power supply Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 k, adjustable curve, SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for external devices (e.g. pot), SELV fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply 289 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). ; Make sure a restart is impossible The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. ; Check the cables for proper fit. Fault ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Phase failure 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Translation of the original operating instructions Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. A phase of the supply voltage fails for at least 5 s. ; When all phases are correctly supplied again, the motor automatically restarts after 10-40 s. Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. 4.8 Switching off the device Switching off the device during operation: ; Switch off the device via the control input. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. ;290 When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Check line voltage, restore power supply. Attention! The error message resets automatically. Device restarts automatically without warning. Faulty connection Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Broken motor winding Replace device Thermal overload Allow motor to cool protector activated off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation (e.g. back point. Let the device pressure too high) cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten 291 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G250-RR17-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replace cables ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean or replace impeller Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Abnormal bearing noise acoustic Visual inspection At least every 6 months At least every 6 months Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device 6.4 Disposal Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.4.2 Disassembly Translation of the original operating instructions Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards 292 Item no. 55701-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 293 Additional documents D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 294 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 7 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 11 6.1 Vibration testing 6.2 Cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection 6.4 Disposal 11 12 12 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock 295 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 1 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. Translation of the original operating instructions 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. 1.7 Mechanical movement WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport WARNING Transporting the fan Injuries from tipping or slipping The fan is always to be transported with care and in its original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling. Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible wind forces. 1.11 Storage ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. Secure the device against accidental contact. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. 296 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 2 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/ TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems. The device is to be used in networks with network quality characteristics as per EN 50160. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 297 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 3 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing Translation of the original operating instructions All dimensions in mm. 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 3 Terminal strip PE L1 L2 L3 NC COM GND 0-10 V +10 V Tightening torque 1.20.2 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery. 298 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 4 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 3~ 400 380 .. 480 Method of obtaining data Status Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml Weight Fan size Rotor surface Electronics housing material Impeller material Housing material Support plate material Inlet nozzle material Guard grille material 50/60 prelim. 2700 550 0.9 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 58.4 A Static 71.7 Yes 47.7 Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen K3G280-RR04-M9 0.54 1820 573 2720 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Conformity with standards Approval Comment 17.5 kg 280 mm Painted black Die-cast aluminum, painted black PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate Die-cast aluminum Sheet steel, galvanized Sheet steel, galvanized Steel, phosphated and coated with black plastic (RAL 9005) 6 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - External 24 V input (parameter setting) - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Motor current limitation - PFC, passive - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000 maximum - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Via terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (if protective earth is connected by customer to the housing's connection point) EN 61800-5-1; CE UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC Operational is only permitted with the optional guard grill available from ebmpapst. 299 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 5 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device from packaging ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact. 3.5 Mounting data NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Strength class of screws Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. 3.6 Transport and storage conditions Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. 8.8 +80 C ; The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during transport and installation. There is a risk of damage to the impeller. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. -40 C CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility Translation of the original operating instructions If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 1675 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point of the customer system to the public power system is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation with the network operator, that this device is only connected to a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. 300 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 6 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Device malfunctions possible Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. Maintain the greatest possible clearance. Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable routing) NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line protection only, no equipment protection). Nominal voltage 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC Fuse VDE 16 A UL 15 A Automatic circuit breaker VDE C16A Cable crosssection mm 1.5 Cable crosssection *AWG 16 * AWG = American Wire Gauge 4.2.3 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 5 W. 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.5 Leakage current For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 4.3 Connection in terminal box Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 301 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 7 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. 4.4 Factory settings Translation of the original operating instructions Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 PWM control PWM control 01 100 5 Yes Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) 302 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 8 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions Drawing preliminary! No. 1 Conn. 1, 2 Designation PE 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 6 L1 L2 L3 NC Color green/ yellow black black black white 1 1 7 COM white 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 10 11 12 13 0-10V RSB RSA GND +10V yellow brown white blue red Function/assignment Protective earth Power supply Power supply Power supply Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 k, adjustable curve, SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV Reference ground for control interface, SELV Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V 3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for external devices (e.g. pot), SELV fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply 303 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 9 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections 4.8 Switching off the device ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). Switching off the device during operation: ; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the fan. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. Fault Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Phase failure Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. A phase of the supply voltage fails for at least 5 s. ; When all phases are correctly supplied again, the motor automatically restarts after 10-40 s. Translation of the original operating instructions Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. The maximum permissible vibration severity must not exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6 months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6. Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies. 304 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 10 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Ambient temperature Reduce the ambient too high temperature. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation (e.g. back point. Let the device pressure too high) cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone.# When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Translation of the original operating instructions Line voltage faulty Faulty connection Broken motor winding Thermal overload protector activated Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply. Attention! The error message resets automatically. Device restarts automatically without warning. Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Replace device Allow motor to cool off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Vibration testing Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694. Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/ s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this. 305 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 11 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Impeller for wear/deposits/ corrosion and damage Tightness of cable gland Visual inspection At least every 6 months Clean or replace impeller Visual inspection At least every 6 months Abnormal bearing noise Vibration test acoustic Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device Vibration measuring device, start-up or run-down measurement At least every 6 months Recommended every 6 months Clean, rebalance and if necessary replace impeller 6.4 Disposal NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. 6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation situation. 6.2 Cleaning Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.3 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Translation of the original operating instructions Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Fastening the protective earth terminal Insulation of cables for damage How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device 6.4.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Fasten Replace cables 6.4.3 Component disposal The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards 306 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 12 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com K3G280-RR04-M9 Siemens AG PD LD Nbg. Operating instructions Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Translation of the original operating instructions Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. 307 Item no. 55770-5-9970 * ENU * Change 94618 * Approved 2017-06-12 * Page 13 / 13 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com 308 D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 309 Additional documents D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280 310 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Bachmuhle 2 D-74673 Mulfingen Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 info1@de.ebmpapst.com www.ebmpapst.com 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or danger to persons. These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device. The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating instructions. These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform about potential dangers and their prevention. Translation of the original operating instructions CONTENTS 1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION 1 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings 1.2 Staff qualifications 1.3 Basic safety rules 1.4 Voltage 1.5 Safety and protective features 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.7 Mechanical movement 1.8 Emissions 1.9 Hot surface 1.10 Transport 1.11 Storage 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2. INTENDED USE 3 3. TECHNICAL DATA 4 3.1 Product drawing 3.2 Nominal data 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011 3.4 Technical description 3.5 Mounting data 3.6 Transport and storage conditions 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 6 4.1 Mechanical connection 4.2 Electrical connection 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.4 Factory settings 4.5 Connection diagram 4.6 Checking connections 4.7 Switching on the device 4.8 Switching off the device 6 6 8 8 9 10 10 10 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES 10 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES 10 6.1 Cleaning 6.2 Safety inspection 6.3 Disposal 11 11 12 1.1 Hazard levels for warnings These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations: DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Compliance with the instructions is imperative. WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken. Exercise extreme caution while working. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified actions are not taken. NOTE A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can lead to property damage. 1.2 Staff qualifications The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated, maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and authorized technical staff. Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation. 1.3 Basic safety rules The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again following installation in the final product. The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be observed when working on the device. Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area increases the risk of accidents. Note the following when working on the device: ; Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the device without the approval of ebm-papst. 1.4 Voltage ; Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see Chapter 6.2 Safety inspection. ; Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately. DANGER Electrically charged device Risk of electric shock When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a rubber mat. 311 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 1 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be energized The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation. Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone. When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. 1.5 Safety and protective features DANGER Protective device missing and protective device not functioning Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for instance when reaching into the device during operation. Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and guard grille. Translation of the original operating instructions The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is possible to reach into with the fingers, for example. 1.7 Mechanical movement DANGER Rotating device Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or the impeller. Secure the device against accidental contact. Before working on the system/machine, wait until all parts have come to a standstill. WARNING Rotating device Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries can result. Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry while working on rotating parts. Protect long hair with a cap. 1.8 Emissions WARNING Depending on the installation and operating conditions, the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A). Risk of noise-induced hearing loss Take appropriate technical safety measures. Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety equipment such as hearing protection. Also observe the requirements of local agencies. 1.9 Hot surface CAUTION High temperature on electronics housing Risk of burns Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. 1.10 Transport The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured adequately. NOTE Transporting the device Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or ineffective protective device. Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a lashing strip. Transport the device in its original packaging only. 1.6 Electromagnetic radiation 1.11 Storage Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction with open- and closed-loop control devices. If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate shielding measures have to be taken by the user. ; Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place, protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original packaging in a clean environment. NOTE Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing the device in customer equipment. Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant. ; Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final installation. ; We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible service life. ; Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as described prior to commissioning. ; Maintain the storage temperature, see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions. ; Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs. 312 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 2 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 2. INTENDED USE The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying air according to its technical data. Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device. Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed. Intended use also includes Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/ TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems. The device is to be used in networks with network quality characteristics as per EN 50160. Use of the device in stationary systems only. Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and 1050 mbar. Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and Chapter 3.2 Nominal data. Operating the device with all protective devices. Following the operating instructions. Improper use Translation of the original operating instructions In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and could be hazardous: Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits or ice formation. Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation. Opening the terminal box during operation. Conveying air that contains abrasive particles. Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected. Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust. Operating the device close to flammable materials or components. Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere. Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related functions. Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated protective devices. In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses. 313 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 3 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 3. TECHNICAL DATA 3.1 Product drawing All dimensions in mm. 1 2 Translation of the original operating instructions 3 Cable diameter min. 8 mm, max. 12 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm Cable diameter min. 4 mm, max. 7 mm, tightening torque 2.5 0.4 Nm (included seal must be used) Tightening torque 1.5 0.2 Nm 314 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 4 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions G3G280-BR04-M7 3.2 Nominal data 3.4 Technical description Motor M3G084-DF Phase Nominal voltage / VAC Nominal voltage range / VAC Frequency / Hz 3~ 400 380 .. 480 Method of obtaining data Speed (rpm) / min-1 Power consumption / W Current draw / A Min. ambient temperature / C Max. ambient temperature / C ml 50/60 2700 530 0.85 -25 60 ml = Max. load * me = Max. efficiency * fa = Free air cs = Customer specification * ce = Customer equipment Subject to change 3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/ 2011 01 Overall efficiency es / % 02 Measurement category 03 Efficiency category 04 Efficiency grade N 05 Variable speed drive 06 Year of manufacture Translation of the original operating instructions 07 Manufacturer 08 Type 09 Power consumption Ped / kW 09 Air flow qv / m/h 09 Pressure increase total psf / Pa 10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 11 Specific ratio* 12 Recycling/disposal 13 Maintenance 14 Additional components * Actual Req. 2015 66 A Static 79.8 Yes 47.2 Weight Size Motor size Rotor surface Terminal box material Electronics housing material Impeller material Number of blades Direction of rotation Degree of protection Insulation class Moisture (F) / Environmental (H) protection class Installation position Condensation drainage holes Mode Motor bearing Technical features 61 The year of manufacture is specified on the product's rating label. ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart * HRA 590344 D-74673 Mulfingen G3G280-BR04-M7 0.48 1505 692 2710 1.01 Information on recycling and disposal is provided in the operating instructions. Information on installation, operation and maintenance is provided in the operating instructions. Components used to calculate the energy efficiency that are not apparent from the measurement category are detailed in the CE declaration. Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller combination in a standardized measurement setup. Touch current according to IEC 60990 (measuring circuit Fig. 4, TN system) Electrical hookup Motor protection Protection class Conformity with standards Approval 15 kg 280 mm 84 Painted black PP plastic Die-cast aluminum, painted black PP plastic 6 Clockwise, viewed toward rotor IP55 "F" H1 Any None S1 Ball bearing; (sealed) - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA - Operation and alarm display - External 24 V input (parameter setting) - Alarm relay - Integrated PID controller - Motor current limitation - PFC, passive - RS-485 MODBUS-RTU - Soft start - EEPROM write cycles: 100,000 maximum - Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM - Control interface with SELV potential safely disconnected from the mains - Thermal overload protection for electronics/motor - Line undervoltage / phase failure detection <= 3.5 mA Terminal box Thermal overload protector (TOP) internally connected I (with customer connection of protective earth) EN 61800-5-1; CE CSA C22.2 No. 77 + CAN/CSAE60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730-1 With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of the device are designed for a maximum of one million load cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for support. ; Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection. 315 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 5 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions G3G280-BR04-M7 Information on surface quality The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial standard. The surface quality may change during the production period. This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional accuracy. The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty. 4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP 4.1 Mechanical connection CAUTION Cutting and crushing hazard when removing blower from packaging Carefully remove the blower from its packaging, touching only the housing. Strictly avoid shocks. Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves. CAUTION Heavy load when unpacking device Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries. 3.5 Mounting data Strength class of screws 8.8 Two people should work together to remove the device from its packaging. ; Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use selflocking screws). Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life 3.6 Transport and storage conditions The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration from sections of the installation. Max. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) Min. permitted ambient temp. for motor (transport/ storage) +80 C Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the substructure. -40 C 3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 1675 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point of the customer system to the public power system is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/ owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation with the network operator, that this device is only connected to a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement. Translation of the original operating instructions If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar elements. ; Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to be installed. ; Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application. CAUTION Possible damage to the device If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result. Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of installation until all fastening screws have been tightened. The fan must not be strained on fastening. 4.2 Electrical connection DANGER Voltage on the device Electric shock Always connect a protective earth first. Check the protective earth. DANGER Faulty insulation Risk of fatal injury from electric shock Use only cables that meet the specified installation regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity, etc. Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any rotating parts. DANGER Electrical charge (>50 C) between phase conductor and protective earth connection after switching off supply with multiple devices connected in parallel. Electric shock, risk of injury 316 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 6 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact. Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply and PE connections. CAUTION Voltage The device is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. When working on the device, secure the system/ machine in which the device is installed so as to prevent it from being switched back on. NOTE Device malfunctions possible Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line. Maintain the greatest possible clearance. Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable routing) NOTE Water ingress into wires or cables Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the device. 4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line protection only, no equipment protection). Nominal voltage 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC 3/PE AC 380-480 VAC 4.2.1 Requirements ; Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the connection data. Translation of the original operating instructions ; Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches the device voltage. ; Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the nameplate. For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor. We recommend the use of 105 C cables. Ensure that the minimum cable cross-section is at least AWG 26 / 0.13 mm. Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1 Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-51 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth symbol and a hole. VDE 16 A UL 15 A Automatic circuit breaker VDE C16A Cable crosssection mm 1.5 Cable crosssection *AWG 16 20 A 20 A C20A 2.5 14 25 A 25 A C25A 4.0 12 * AWG = American Wire Gauge 4.2.3 Reactive currents Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC limits (interference emission and immunity to interference), reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched on. Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry environment. Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with an all-pole disconnection switch. Fuse The values are typically in the range < 250 mA At the same time, the effective power in this operating state (operational readiness) is typically < 5 W. 4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices (type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety while operating the device. When the device power supply is switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual current devices. We recommend the use of residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K). 4.2.5 Leakage current For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value. 4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA). 317 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 7 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 4.3 Connection in terminal box 4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection Fig. 2: Fan installed lying flat, cable routed in a U-shaped loop. Fig. 1: Recommended stripped lengths in mm (inside terminal box) When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward. Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. NOTE Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable used. This must be checked by the user. 4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. ; Remove the cap from the cable gland. Fig. 3: Cable routing for fans installed upright. Only remove caps where cables are fed in. 4.4 Factory settings ; Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal box. ; First connect the "PE" (protective earth). ; Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals. Translation of the original operating instructions Use a screwdriver to do so. When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out. ; Seal the terminal box. 4.3.3 Cable routing Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable. NOTE Damage caused by moisture penetration. Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is constantly present at the cable glands. Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst. Mode parameter set 1 Mode parameter set 2 Fan/device address Max. PWM / % Min. PWM / % Save set value to EEPROM Set value requirement Direction of action parameter set 1 Direction of action parameter set 2 PWM control PWM control 01 100 5 Yes Analog (linear) Positive (heating) Positive (heating) To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop wherever possible. If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example. 318 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 8 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 4.5 Connection diagram Translation of the original operating instructions No. Conn. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Designation PE PE L1 L2 L3 NC 7 COM 8 9 10 11 GND RSA RSB 0-10 V 12 +10 V / 24 V IN Function/assignment Protective earth Protective earth Power supply Power supply Power supply Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation on control interface side Reference ground for control interface, SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV Analog input (set value) SELV, 0-10 V, Ri = 100 k, adjustable curve, jumpered to +10 V corresponds to 100% PWM Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, SELV, +10 V 3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof, power supply for external devices (e.g. pot); fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply 319 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 9 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 4.6 Checking connections ; When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last. ; Ensure isolation from supply (all phases). ; Make sure a restart is impossible ; Check the cables for proper fit. ; Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing. ; Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover closes without resistance. ; Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to the threads. ; Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened. 4.7 Switching on the device The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or similar connectors by the customer. WARNING Hot motor housing Risk of fire Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are located close to the blower. ; Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage and make sure the protective devices are functional. ; Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any foreign matter found. ; Apply the nominal supply voltage. ; Start the device by changing the input signal. NOTE Damage to the device from vibration Bearing damage, shorter service life Translation of the original operating instructions Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the entire speed control range. Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural resonance. Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the course of fan commissioning. Either run through the resonant range as quickly as possible with speed control or find another remedy. Operation with excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature failure. 4.8 Switching off the device Switching off the device during operation: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. Switching off the device for maintenance: ; Switch off the device via the control input. ; Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power supply. 5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off automatically in the event of the faults described in the table. Fault Rotor position detection error Blocked rotor Line undervoltage (line voltage outside of permitted nominal voltage range) Phase failure Safety feature description/ function An automatic restart follows. ; After the blockage is removed, the motor restarts automatically. ; If the line voltage returns to permitted values, the motor restarts automatically. A phase of the supply voltage fails for at least 5 s. ; When all phases are correctly supplied again, the motor automatically restarts after 10-40 s. 6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE CAUSES AND REMEDIES Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebmpapst for repair or replacement. WARNING Live terminals and connections even with device switched off Electric shock Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles before opening the device. CAUTION If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied, the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power failure. Risk of injury Keep out of the device's danger zone. When working on the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it cannot be switched back on. Wait until the device comes to a stop. After working on the device, remove any tools or other objects from the device. If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage, we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings. Malfunction/fault Impeller not running smoothly Possible cause Imbalance in rotating parts Possible remedy Clean the device; replace it if imbalance persists after cleaning. Make sure no weight clips are removed during cleaning. 320 ; Disconnect the device from the power supply. Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 10 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Operating instructions G3G280-BR04-M7 Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Line voltage faulty Faulty connection Broken motor winding Thermal overload protector activated Deficient cooling Translation of the original operating instructions Ambient temperature too high Switch off, isolate from supply and remove mechanical blockage. Check line voltage, restore power supply. Attention! The error message resets automatically. Device restarts automatically without warning. Isolate from supply, correct connection; see connection diagram. Replace device Allow motor to cool off, locate and rectify cause of error, release restart lockout if necessary Improve cooling. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Reduce the ambient temperature. Let the device cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. Impermissible point of Correct the operating operation (e.g. back point. Let the device pressure too high) cool down. To reset the error message, switch off the line voltage for at least 25 s and then switch it on again. Alternatively, reset the error message by applying a control signal of < 0.5 V to Din1 or by shorting Din1 to GND. In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst. 6.1 Cleaning NOTE Damage to the device during cleaning Malfunction possible Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents. Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning 6.2 Safety inspection NOTE High-voltage test The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied. Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by the standard. What to check Contact protection cover for intactness or damage Device for damage to blades and housing Fastening the cables Insulation of cables for damage Tightness of cable gland How to check How often Visual inspection At least every 6 months What action? Repair or replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Replacement of device Visual inspection At least every 6 months Visual inspection At least every 6 months Fasten Visual inspection At least every 6 months Abnormal bearing noise acoustic Retighten, replace if damaged Replace device At least every 6 months Replace cables 321 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 11 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com G3G280-BR04-M7 Operating instructions 6.3 Disposal For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are top priority corporate goals. ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented around the world on the basis of German standards. Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety and health protection are fixed criteria. The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal of the product and its components. Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for electronic scrap. Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal. 6.3.1 Country-specific legal requirements NOTE Country-specific legal requirements Always observe the applicable country-specific legal regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded. 6.3.2 Disassembly Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge. The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal employing standard procedures for motors. WARNING Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the product components are heavy. These components could drop off during disassembly. This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage. Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling. 6.3.3 Component disposal Translation of the original operating instructions The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic. Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable. Separate the components for recycling into the following categories: Steel and iron Aluminum Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance with marking Insulating materials Cables and wires Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG. ; Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron and steel. Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same manner. The materials concerned are as follows: Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box Power cables Cables for internal wiring Electrolytic capacitors 322 Item no. 56754-5-9970 * ENU * Change 200100 * Approved 2018-10-04 * Page 12 / 12 ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG * Bachmuhle 2 * D-74673 Mulfingen * Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 * Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 * info1@de.ebmpapst.com * www.ebmpapst.com Index " "Siemens Industry Online Support" App, 162 5 5 safety rules, 15 A Air discharge throttle metal plate, 81 Aligning, 60 Prerequisites, 54 Alignment accuracy, 63 Aluminum conductors, 73 Anti-condensation heating, 33, 98 installation, 135 Insulation resistance, 53 Anti-corrosion agent Removing, 55 Anti-freeze, 44 Anti-freeze protection, 44 Application range, 21 B Bearing currents, 46, 84 Bearing insulation, 47 Bearing seizure damage, 41 Bearing shield Assembly, 123 Disassembly, 123 Bearing temperature Monitoring, 93 Set values, 93 Bolt locking device, 163 C Cable lug, 71 Cable outlet direction, 82 Center of gravity, 37, 58 Certificates EAC, 23 UL and cUL, 24 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning, 89 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Circuit diagram, 69 Cleaning, 110 Spent grease chamber, 116 Condensation, 44, 58 Connecting cables Selection of, 68, 75 Connection Electrical, 70 External fan, 75 Holding brake, 83 Speed encoder, 82 Temperature sensor, 83 Connection data, 70 Converter, 24 Cooling, 31 Cooling capacity, 25 Cooling method, 25 Cooling water Connection, 65 Specification, 29 Cooling water intake temperature, 30 Cooling water supply, 90, 97 Corrective maintenance Initial inspection, 107 Corrosion protection, 45 Creepage distance, 72 D Degree of protection, 25 Disassembly, 120 Disposal, 158 External fan, 127 Machine, 119 Disposal Chemicals, 159 Components, 158 Drive, 24 DRIVE-CLiQ, 67, 130 E Electromagnetic fields, 19 EMC cable glands, 70 Emergency off, 99 Emitted interference, 19 Environmental requirements, 26 Equipotential bonding, 74 323 Index Equipotential bonding conductor, 46, 84 ESD guidelines, 18 External fan, 25, 33, 145 Connection, 75, 77, 78 Filter mat, 118 Maintaining, 116 Maintenance, 116 Refitting, 66, 126 Insulation resistance, 50, 88, 109 Anti-condensation heating, 53 measure, 51 Interference immunity, 19 Interference voltages, 19 Interlocking circuit Anti-condensation heating, 33 External fan, 33 F L Faults Electrical, 101, 102 Holding brake, 103 Inspection, 100, 107 Mechanical, 102 Roller bearings, 103 Faults in operation, 96 Fixing, 67 Flammable substances, 17 Flange-mounted motors, 65 Foundation surfaces, 54 Lifting, 37, 57 Line operation, 24 Live parts, 16 Long-term storage, 43 Low-Voltage Directive, 15 G General inspection, 108 Geometry of the flange, 54 H Hazardous substances, 17 Hearing damage, 17, 35 Holding brake, 26, 167 Connection, 83 Faults, 103 Magnetic field, 87 Spare parts, 134 Hot surfaces, 17 Hotline, 162 I Initial inspection, 109 Inspection Faults, 100, 107 Installation Initial inspection, 107 Insulated bearings, 46 324 M Machine Mounting, 61 setting down, 60 Machine design, 23 IEC, 23 Main inspection, 110 Maintenance Cooling system, 116 Maintenance intervals, 105 Maximum speed, 91 Flange mounting, 65 Minimum clearances, 72 Motor Aligning, 63 Mounting Flange, 65 Motor feet, 65 Mounting-foot hole dimensions, 54 N Noise emissions, 17, 35 O Operating mode, 29 Operating pressure, 66 Output element, 56 Overspeeds, 29 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Index P Paint finish, 27 Paint system, 131 Paintwork damage, 131 Permanent lubrication, 109 Pipe connection, 32 Polarization index, 50, 53, 88, 109 Preparations for assembly, 50 Pressure drop, 33, 66 Property class, 61 Protecting ring, 122 Protective conductor, 85 Q Qualified personnel, 16 R Rating plate, 21 Bar code, 133 REACH regulation, 157 Re-commissioning, 100 Regreasing, 109, 114 Regreasing device, 110 Regreasing intervals, 108 Regreasing system, 115 Residual risks, 29 Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances, 157 Risk of explosion, 21 RoHS, 157 Roller bearings faults, 103 Versions, 27 Rolling bearings Replacement, 134 Rotating parts, 16 Rotor, 22 attach, 119 Rotor shipping brace, 39, 43 S Safety instructions Flammable substances, 17 Hazardous substances, 17 Hot surfaces, 17 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 Live parts, 16 Rotating parts, 16 Screws with preCOTE coating, 120 Sealing, 73 Sealing agent, 124 Selection of bolts, 61 Sensor module, 131 Shaft assembly, 35 Siemens Industry Online Support App, 162 Siemens Service Center, 162 Spare parts, 133 External fan option L75, 145 Holding brake, 134 Motor, 135, 144 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, 141, 142, 150, 151, 152 Rolling-contact bearing bush, drive end, 136, 137, 138, 139, 146, 147, 148, 149 Rolling-contact bearing bush, non-drive end, 140, 143, 153 Speed encoder, 155, 156 Terminal box, 154 Spare parts ordering, 133 Spares on Web, 134 Speed, 35 Speed encoder Connection, 82 Electrical connection, 130 Mounting, 129 Separating, 129 Speed monitoring, 98 Spent grease chamber, 116 Stoppages, 99 Roller bearings, 99 storage Indoor, 42 Supplementary devices, 25 Switching on, 91, 92 System resonances, 35 T Technical Support, 162 Temperature sensor Connection, 83 Terminal box, 69, 70 Maintaining, 118 Sealing, 74 Terminal designation, 69 Test run, 92 Thermal motor protection, 34 325 Index Threadlocker, 120 Tightening torques, 67 Bolted connection, 163 Torsional loadings, 35 Training, 161 Transporting, 37, 38, 57 Type of balancing, 55, 57 Types of construction, 24 V Vibration response of the system, 61 Vibration severity, 61 Vibration values, 35, 92 W Water drain hole, 44, 59 Water drainage hole, 58 326 SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. Operating Instructions 01/2019 AA Manual STROMAG Break AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03H4 AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03H4 AA AA AA AA AA AA AB OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17H9 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04H9 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03M4 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03M4 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17M9 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04M9 OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_G3G280BR04M7 Further Information www.siemens.com/drives Siemens AG Process Industries and Drives Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY